JP2020043984A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can perform control such that recognizable time of three performance patterns differs and a mode of a performance in a performance pattern during time of a variation completion suggestive performance differs between variation patterns 2A to 2C in normal ready-to-win as a first display mode in which a common performance pattern is stopped in two columns of performance patterns, and variation patterns 3A to 3C for executing an SP ready-to-win performance as the first display mode having a higher degree of expectation toward a jackpot than a normal ready-to-win.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 55-1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition, and based on the determination result, a fluctuating effect of the effect symbol is displayed as an image. What is executed by the device is common.

  In such a gaming machine, there are a plurality of variation patterns of the variation effect of the effect symbol, and the variation effect of the effect symbol in the selected variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result. This is displayed on a display device (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-018225A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is room for improvement in the manner in which the effect symbols are fluctuated, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

[Application Example 1]
In order to solve the above-described problem, the gaming machine according to the application example 1 of the present application displays a symbol (special symbol TZ) in a variable manner based on the establishment of a start condition, and stops and displays the symbol in a predetermined specific symbol. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, a variation effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the symbol variation display. And, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a variable effect control means (effect control board 130) controllable to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol, The variation effect control means is capable of recognizing the effect symbol in all of a plurality of rows during swing display of the symbol and swingable in a recognizable display mode (fluctuation end suggestion effect, FIG. 50-2 ( c), figure 2-2 (d)), a common display mode (first display mode) in which, during the variable display of the symbol, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol common to two of the plurality of columns. , A stop effect can be executed according to the second time when the first variation effect (variation patterns 2A to 2C) is executed, and the special game is executed from the first variation effect. There is a case in which a second variation effect (variation patterns 3A to 3C) having a high degree of expectation for being executed is executed, and the case in which the first variation effect is executed and the case in which the second variation effect is executed are different. The gist of the present invention is that the execution time of the first time is different, and the effect of the predetermined effect (effect indicating change end) in the effect symbol during the first time can be controlled differently.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to provide the game machine which can improve the interest of a game.

It is a figure showing an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a figure showing an example of a block diagram of the whole game machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a main process in a main control board. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a timer interrupt process in the main control board. It is a figure showing an input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure showing the 1st starting opening detection switch input processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric power control processing in a main control board. It is a figure showing the kind of the command transmitted to the production control board from the main control board. It is a figure showing the kind of the command transmitted to the production control board from the main control board. It is a figure showing the main processing in the production control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in the effect control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect process in the effect control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination processing in the effect control part. It is a figure showing an example of an icon final display mode decision table. It is a figure showing an example of a change scenario decision table. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in the effect control part. It is a figure showing an example of a change pattern decision table for a reservation icon. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a one-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure showing an example of the two-step change pattern decision table for the icons concerned. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship of the frequency of occurrence of a hold icon display mode and a change effect occurrence timing, and (b) is a figure which shows the relationship 1 of the occurrence frequency of a change effect type and change effect occurrence timing. (C) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the occurrence frequency of the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing, and (d) shows the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound at the time of the icon occurrence (change). FIG. It is a figure showing the main processing in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interruption process in a general control part. It is a figure showing V blank interruption processing in an integrated control part. It is a timing chart 1 of a change effect at the time of winning. It is a timing chart 2 of a change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the change effect at the time of a winning. 5 is a timing chart 1 of a normal change pattern 01. 6 is a timing chart 2 of a normal change pattern 01. It is a figure showing an example of production of normal change pattern 01. 6 is a timing chart 1 of a character action change pattern 01. 6 is a timing chart 2 of a character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the character action change pattern 01. FIG. 33 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 32; It is a figure showing the timing chart 1 of the symbol action change pattern 01. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a timing chart 2 of a symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the symbol effect change pattern 01. FIG. 37 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 36; It is a timing chart which starts a fluctuation effect from a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which a variable effect is started from a customer waiting state. FIG. 40 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 39; It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in which the number of reservations increases during a variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure showing an example of a production in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a timing chart which the number of reservations increases during specific reach production. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure showing an example of production in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific game state. FIG. 49 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 48; It is a figure explaining transition of the display mode when it is displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode. It is a figure explaining the change of the display mode when SP reach effect is performed. It is a figure explaining transition of a display mode when it is displayed in a non-reach mode in the first display mode. It is a figure explaining an example of a change end suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining another example of a change end suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the pseudo continuous production in the case of being displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the pseudo consecutive production in the case of being displayed in a non-reach mode in the first display mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the resurrection effect when SP reach effect is performed. It is another example of the change end suggestion effect, and is a figure explaining an example. It is another example of the change end suggestion effect, and is a figure explaining an example. It is another example of the change end suggestion effect, and is a figure explaining an example. It is another example of the change end suggestion effect, and is a figure explaining an example. It is another example of the change end suggestion effect, and is a figure explaining an example. It is another example of the change end suggestion effect, and is a figure explaining an example. It is a figure explaining an example of a change end suggestion effect in effect symbol 5470a. It is the figure which illustrated the low probability fluctuation pattern table which is the fluctuation pattern table in the low probability game state. It is a figure which illustrated the high-precision fluctuation pattern table which is a fluctuation pattern table in a high probability game state. It is the figure which illustrated the small reservation fluctuation pattern table which is the fluctuation pattern table when the number of reservations is small. It is the figure which illustrated the multiple reservation fluctuation pattern table which is the fluctuation pattern table when the number of reservations is large. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1P in a state where the outer frame 10, the game board unit 12P, and the inner frame 14P are open. It is a rear view of the game board unit 12P. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board unit 12P. It is (a) perspective view of assembly 2P, (b) rear view, (c) right side view. It is an exploded perspective view of the assembly 2P. It is the left side view showing signs that board case 3P is assembled to pedestal 20P. It is (a) perspective view, (b) rear view, and (c) right side view of board case 3P. It is an exploded perspective view of board case 3P. It is the (a) rear view and (b) front view of sealing body 4P which combined outer case 45P and inner case 40P. FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to line AA in FIG. 63 in an outer case 45P of a board case 1003 according to a modification. FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to line AA in FIG. 63 in an outer case 45P of a board case 1103 according to a modification. FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to line AA in FIG. 63 in an outer case 45P of a board case 1203 according to a modification. It is a rear view of the board case 1303 which concerns on a modification. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1303 as viewed in the direction of arrows BB in FIG. 69. It is a rear view of the board case 1551 concerning a modification. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 as viewed from an angle at which the seal portion 1561 overlaps a mounting portion of the ROM 502. It is a rear view of board case 1700 in which control board 1705 concerning a 5th embodiment was stored. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a seal portion 1710, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a date mark portion 1720. (A) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of an opening prohibition seal portion 1730, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a state where the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is attached to a substrate case 1700. It is the schematic explaining the structure of the display of the information display 1750. It is a table for explaining the content displayed on the information display 1750 and the display form regarding the performance display of the gaming machine 1P. It is a table for explaining the content displayed on the information display 1750 and the display form with respect to the setting display of the gaming machine 1P. (A) is a sectional view of an identification display portion 1791 of a board case 1790 according to a modification, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of an identification display portion 1796 of a board case 1795 according to a modification. It is a rear view of board case 1803 in which control board 501 concerning a 6th embodiment was stored. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the electronic component 595 is viewed from obliquely above via a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561. It is the (a) top view of transparent socket 1801, (b) side view. 7A to 7D are cross-sectional views of the substrate cases 1805 to 1808 at positions corresponding to line CC in FIG. 7A and 7B are sectional views (a) and (b) of the board cases 1809 and 1810 taken along a line corresponding to line CC in FIG. 74-1. It is an explanatory view showing a special position display section 541. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram of one method for reducing the light transmittance of a seal portion 1560. It is a typical back view of case part 1813 which stored prize ball board 1811. It is a typical rear view of the case part 1823 which accommodated the effect board 1821. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of an assembly 2P, in which a control substrate 501 is provided with a first area 1900a and a second area 1900b.

(1st Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machines)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 in which a game area 5a in which a game ball flows is formed.

  The outer frame 2 is provided with a decorative plate 2b attached to a lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a having a central portion opened in the front-rear direction, and is fixed to an island facility of a game store (for example, a nail or a fastener). A) fixed through.

  The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Have been. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are provided. Maintenance and the like can be performed.

  The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported by the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. I have. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5 a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

  An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper portion of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8 a (a glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like) is formed to cover the opening 8 from behind. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

  Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have not entered the upper tray 11 and flowed into an overflowing ball channel described later, and a game ball. A launch operation device 13 capable of performing an operation for launching is provided.

  The audio output device 9 is provided at two intervals on the upper part of the glass frame 4 at an interval, and outputs a BGM (background music), an SE (sound effect), or the like to perform an effect by sound (music, voice). It has become. In addition, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform lighting effects by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a (not shown) that is controlled to be turned on / flashing when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality described below occurs.

  In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction of the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

  In addition, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) functioning as input devices for performing a determination operation and a selection operation related to various effects described below are provided on a central front side portion of the upper tray 11. They are provided side by side.

  The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a determination operation or the like (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect button. A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 2) having a button driving motor for moving the button 17 in the vertical direction is provided so that a player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (connected to the cross key 19 for detecting an operation on the cross key 19). 2 (see FIG. 2) so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  Further, a lending return operation unit 20 is provided in a portion on the right side of the upper tray 11, which can perform a lending operation of a game ball and an operation of returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance. When a lending button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining money stored in the storage medium received by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to lend the gaming ball. Is performed, and when the return button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, there is formed an overflowing ball channel (not shown) for receiving game balls that cannot fit in the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. Further, a saucer full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the lower saucer 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path. While the game is detected, the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 100 described later is stopped.

  The firing operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 2), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) composed of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the turning angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emission for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. An apparatus 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b operates to send out the game balls one by one.

  The handle light emitting device 15c forms a front portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape bulging forward, and a plurality of LEDs are disposed in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Have been. When the LED emits light, it is possible to execute a light emission effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined mode. At the front end of the handle light emitting device 15c, an air outlet 15d serving as an outlet of the wind (air) sent from the air blower 21 described later is opened.

  On the back side of the glass frame 4, a blower 21 for sending out wind (air) in a predetermined manner at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13 is provided. The blower 21 includes a blower (not shown) for sending out wind (air) and a blower motor (not shown) for operating the blower. ) Passes through the base 14 of the firing operation device 13 and the inside of the handle light emitting device 15c, and is sent out from the air outlet 15d toward the player's hand. By operating the blower 21, it is possible to execute a blowing effect of sending out wind (air) in a predetermined manner toward the hand of the player operating the firing handle 15.

  It should be noted that the blower 21 is not provided at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13 but is provided around the decorative plate 2b of the outer frame 2 or around the transparent member 8a of the glass frame 4 so that the wind (air) is directed toward the player. ) May be sent out. Further, a plurality of blowers 21 may be provided.

  In the game board mounting frame 3, a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a game ball launching device 26 for firing a game ball toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

  The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and can store the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

  The game ball launching device 26 has a launching member 28 for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b for driving the launching member 28 (see FIG. 2), and a launching member 28 directed to the lower left end of the game board. A firing rail 29 that rises and inclines, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a firing position that is a lower end portion of the firing rail 29 is provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the firing position, the game ball A is hit toward the game area 5a by the operation of the hitting member 28.

  The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked, and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed. 4 is released, and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

  At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding a game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 are provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 for guiding the game balls fired by the game ball launch device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream portion of the game area 5a for guiding game balls flowing down to the outside of the game area (recovery portion of the game board mounting frame 3).

  At the approximate center of the game area 5a, there is provided a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 for restricting the entry of a game ball into a so-called center case, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. A warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the decoration frame 40 is provided on a side portion of the decoration frame 40, and a decoration frame 40 is provided below the decoration frame 40 by the warp device 41. There is provided a stage section 42 for rolling game balls introduced into the inside of the box and flowing the balls down below the decorative frame 40.

  A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning ports 43 in which game balls can always win (enter) are provided at intervals below the game area 5a. When the game balls that have won (entered) the ball 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). It is paid out to the upper receiving tray 11 as a ball.

  On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, general-purpose gates 44 (general-purpose starting areas) through which game balls can pass are provided, and game balls that have passed through the general-purpose gates 44 are provided. When it is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a normal symbol hit lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. In addition, the winning lottery of the normal symbol will be described later.

  A first starting port 45 (special figure starting area) in which a game ball can always win (enter) is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage section 42, and the first starting port 45 is provided. When the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2) detects a game ball that has won (entered) a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) from the game ball dispensing apparatus 100 as an upper tray as a prize ball. 11 is paid out. In addition to the payout of the prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

  Immediately below the first starting port 45, a game ball is changed from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win (enter) a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (usually winning a lottery with a symbol). A variable starting unit 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which winning (ball entry) is possible or easy.

  The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) in which a game ball can win (entering a ball) and a second detecting port for detecting a winning of the game ball (entering a ball) to the second starting port 47. A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 for converting (variable) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second opening / closing solenoid for opening / closing the movable member 48 48b (see FIG. 2). When the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( Ball entry) is possible or easy.

  When a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are sent from the game ball payout apparatus 100 as prize balls. The upper tray 11 is paid out. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

  Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the general-purpose gate 44 on the right side, a closed state in which it is impossible to win (enter) a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the winning of the special symbol jackpot lottery). A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from the (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (ball entry).

  The variable winning section 49 includes a special winning opening 50 in which a game ball can win (enter), and a special winning opening detection switch 50a (FIG. 7) for detecting a winning (entering) of a game ball to the special winning opening 50. 2), an opening / closing member 51 for converting (variable) the special winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening / closing member 51. When the special winning opening 50 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the special winning opening 50 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball (entering the ball) is performed. ) Is possible or easy.

  When a game ball that has won (entered) the special winning opening 50 is detected by the special winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are sent from the game ball dispensing device 100 to the upper tray as a prize ball. It is paid to 11.

  On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won and the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, A winning ball flow path 52 (not shown) is provided for receiving the game balls detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a and the special winning port detection switch 50a and flowing them down while collecting them.

  A winning confirmation detection switch 52a (see FIG. 2) for detecting a game ball flowing down the winning ball flow path 52 after being detected by various detection switches is provided in a downstream portion of the winning ball flow path 52. The winning confirmation detecting switch 52a detects the game ball again after being detected by the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, and the special winning opening detecting switch 50a. Is used to determine whether the winning is a proper winning (ball entry) or an abnormal winning (ball entry).

  Outside the game area 5a, a symbol display device including a first special symbol indicator 60, a second special symbol indicator 61, and a normal symbol indicator 62, a first special symbol hold indicator 63, a second special symbol indicator Symbol hold display 64; A hold display device including a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) described later occurs, and a jackpot game (special) described later. A right-handed indicator 67 (see FIG. 2) for urging the player to shoot a game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a during the (game state) or the time-saving game state is provided.

  The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery performed on condition that a game ball wins (enters) in the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol performed on condition that the game ball wins (enters) in the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) a result of a normal symbol winning lottery performed on condition that a game ball wins (enters) at the general symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

  The jackpot lottery of the first special symbol means that when a game ball wins (enters) in the first starting port 45, a jackpot determination random value or the like (judgment information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination random value and the jackpot are acquired. This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a “big hit” by comparing with a determination value. In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the first special symbol display unit 60 displays the variation of the first special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol stop display indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

  The jackpot lottery of the second special symbol means that when a game ball wins (enters) in the second starting opening 47, a jackpot determination random number value (judgment information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination random value and the jackpot are acquired. This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a “big hit” by comparing with a determination value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol indicator 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is information of the lottery result.

  The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at a predetermined interval or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. I do. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (big hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of each big hit lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the “big hit” is a big hit lottery (special game state) in the first special symbol big hit lottery (special game determination) or a second special symbol big hit lottery (special game determination). Means that you have acquired the right to execute. The "big hit game (special game state)" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the special winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

  Although the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the special winning opening 50 even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. When nine (for example, nine) win (enter a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "big hit game (special game state)" is a game state that is advantageous to a player who easily obtains a prize ball. In the present embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special game states) having different degrees of advantage for the player can be generated, which will be described in detail later.

  The normal symbol hit lottery means that a hit determination random value is obtained when a game ball passes through the general figure gate 44, and the obtained hit determination random value is compared with the hit determination value to determine whether it is "hit". It corresponds to judging whether or not. Note that when a normal symbol hitting lottery is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, a stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the ordinary symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 62 is constituted by one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the normal symbol change display. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (winning mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

  In the present embodiment, “winning” refers to a state in which a right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a normal symbol winning lottery. The term “winning game (auxiliary game)” refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined mode.

  The maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the second opening 47 in the hit game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, but the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time are not set before the second opening 47 is reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) win (enter), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is in a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is easily executed (the start condition of the variable display is easily satisfied). In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of win games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

  The first special symbol holding display 63 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and is a first special symbol jackpot lottery (the first special symbol of the first special symbol) stored when a game ball is won (enters) in the first starting port 45. This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved storage) for performing the variable display), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved storages. In addition, the first hold storage is configured to store up to four, but may be less or more than four.

  The second special symbol holding display 64 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball is won (enters) in the second starting port 47. This is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved storage) for performing the variable display), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved storages. Although the maximum number of the second reserved storages is four, the number of the second reserved storages may be smaller or larger than four.

  The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is a right for performing a normal symbol winning lottery (normal symbol change display) stored when a game ball is won (passed) at the general symbol gate 44. This is for displaying the number of (Public figure on-hold storage), and lights or flashes in a manner indicating the number of (Public figure on-hold storage). It should be noted that up to four general-purpose pending storages are stored, but the number may be less or more than four.

  Note that the first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by 7-segment LEDs. For example, when the special symbol jackpot lottery is won, "7" is stopped and displayed, and if it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. "Should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the special symbol change display, the stop result of the previous change display is displayed by turning on the LED. Therefore, when the change display starts, the change display is started by turning off the LED. It becomes easy to grasp that it has started.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the effect space 40a, and is provided below the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) including a liquid crystal display having a smaller display area than the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided, and a character face is provided above the effect space 40a. Is provided.
In the present embodiment, the “first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)” and the “second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal)” may be collectively referred to as “image display device”.

  The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, there is a customer waiting demonstration effect that is executed when the special symbol variable display is not performed, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed when the special symbol variable display is performed, or a notice by a character. There are directing.

  Further, the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) drives a panel drive constituted by a solenoid, a motor, and the like during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is possible to perform a movement effect by moving with the device 75 (see FIG. 2).

  Specifically, a standby position (first position) located closer to an end (lower) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and a center position (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Is moved up and down (up and down) with the effect position (second position) located at the position. Note that the moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the moving effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

  In the display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), three rows of variable display areas such as a left area, a center area, and a right area are formed. By scrolling the displayed effect symbol 70a in the vertical direction (from the top to the bottom in the present embodiment), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is performed.

  The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, a symbol indicating a number from “1” to “9”, and the special symbol variable display executed by the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61. In response to (synchronous), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner. That is, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be provided in addition to a symbol indicating a number.

  In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, big hit mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big hit lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols such as "777" or a combination of effect symbols having regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is other modes. is there. In addition, the mode of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be such that scrolling in the left-right direction or rotating (rotating) on the spot.

  In addition, during the fluctuation display of the effect design 70a, various effect images such as a reach effect, a background image, and a character, a movie, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image in accordance with the result of the jackpot lottery. By displaying the image on the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the degree of expectation of the player to generate a big hit (special game state) (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit winning expectation”) is increased.

  Here, the reach effect is to give the player a sense of expectation to win the jackpot, in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols 70a of “777” is set as the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot (the jackpot result mode), two effect symbols 70a are displayed in the left and right regions. 7 ", the temporary effect is stopped, and the remaining effect symbols 70a fluctuate in the central area.

  In addition, the "temporary stop" means that the effect design 70a fluctuates slightly, or the effect design 70a is deformed small, so that the effect appears to the player as if the effect design 70a is stopped (complete stoppage). Not).

  In the present embodiment, there are five types of reach effects, “normal reach effect”, “SP reach effect”, “SPSP reach effect”, and “full rotation reach effect”.

  "Normal reach effect" means that two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area in a state where the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a is in the central area. It is a fluctuating reach production.

  The “SP reach effect” means that a movie (movie) having a longer time than the movie related to the normal reach effect, with two effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuating in the central area. , Animation, etc.).

  The "SPSP reach effect" means that the two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the remaining one effect pattern 70a fluctuates in the central area, and is longer than the movie related to the SP reach effect (long-form). Movie (moving image, animation, etc.).

  The “full-rotation reach effect” is a reach effect that fluctuates at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a that notify the jackpot are prepared. In the present embodiment, the reach effect is executed only when the winning in the jackpot lottery is won.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation degree related to the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect <full-rotation reach effect (big hit decision).

  Also, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1), which is the current number of first reserved storages, is displayed. And a second reserved icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2), which is the current number of second reserved storages. And an icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed.

  The first reserved icon display area 70B is partitioned in the form of a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. On the display units 70B1 to 70B4, the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is displayed. That is, the number of the first reserved icons increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease of the first special symbol reservation number (U1).

  More specifically, first holding icon H11 indicating first holding storage in which the first special symbol change display is first performed is displayed on first display portion 70B1, and 2nd holding icon H2 is displayed on second display portion 70B2. Firstly, a first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold storage in which the first special symbol change display is executed is displayed, and third change display of the first special symbol is executed third on the third display portion 70B3. The first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold storage is displayed, and the first display icon H14 indicating the first hold storage in which the fourth special symbol variation display is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4. Is done.

  The second reserved icon display area 70D is partitioned in the form of a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. On the display units 70D1 to 70D4, a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) are displayed. That is, the number of the second reserved icons is increased or decreased in accordance with the increase or decrease of the second special symbol reserved number (U2).

  More specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second holding icon H21 indicating a second holding storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays 2nd holding icon H21. Secondly, the second holding icon H22 indicating the second holding storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the third display unit 70D3 executes the third variable display of the second special symbol. A second holding icon H23 indicating the second holding storage is displayed, and a second holding icon H24 indicating the second holding storage in which the fourth special symbol change display is executed fourthly is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4. Is done. In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol holding number” may be referred to as a “first holding number” and the “second special symbol holding number” may be referred to as a “second holding number”.

  The icon display area 70C displays the first reserved icon displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a), or the second reserved icon. The icon TH is displayed by moving (shifting) the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon TH disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may be deleted in the middle of the change display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the “first reserved icon”, the “second reserved icon”, and the “icon” may be collectively referred to as an “icon”.

  The movable effect member 73 emits light by the panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of lamps (eg, LEDs) during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A light emission effect can be performed, and a movement effect can be performed by moving the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 2) including a solenoid, a motor, and the like.

  Specifically, a light emission effect is performed by emitting a plurality of lamps (LEDs or the like) in a predetermined light emission color in accordance with the progress of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Further, the standby position (first position) is located closer to the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and is located closer to the center (lower) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The movement effect is performed by moving (elevating, descending) in the up-down direction with respect to the effect position (second position). In addition, you may comprise so that a light emission effect and a movement effect may be performed by operation of the effect button 17.

  On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), island facilities, etc. A game ball storage unit 101 (not shown) for storing the supplied game balls and supplying the game balls to the game ball payout apparatus 100, and a main control device 110A (not shown) incorporating a main control board 110 for integrally controlling the progress of the game. ), A payout control device 120A (not shown) including a payout control substrate 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 in accordance with a payout control command from the main control substrate 110, and an effect control command from the main control substrate 110. Effect control device 130A (not shown) incorporating an effect control board 130 for controlling the effect according to the power supply, and a power supply device 1 incorporating a power supply substrate 160 for supplying a power supply voltage to various control devices. 0A (not shown), external to the gaming information of the gaming machine game for outputting (game signal) information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 2) is provided.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, a control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is an overall block diagram of gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment.

  The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to a volatile storage unit) serving as a work area during the arithmetic processing. A chip microcomputer 110m, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like are provided. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs an arithmetic process related to a game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby controlling the controlled device (various solenoids and various displays). ) And transmits a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

  Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is based on the main control board. A command (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130.

  The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detecting switch 43a, a gate detecting switch 44a, a first starting opening detecting switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a big winning opening detecting switch 50a, and a winning confirmation detecting switch 52a. , A magnetic detection sensor 53a, a radio wave detection sensor 54a, a RAM clear switch 55a, a payout control board 120, and the like. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input ports, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

  The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second starting opening / closing solenoid 48b, a special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special opening. The symbol hold display 63, the second special symbol hold display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, the number of rounds display 66, the right-hand display 67, the game information output terminal board 90, the effect control board 130, etc. are connected. Have been. A drive control signal for controlling various solenoids, a display control signal for controlling various displays via an output port, and a game to be notified from the game information output terminal board to the outside of the game machine (such as a hall computer). Information and the like are output.

  The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of a payout command from the main control board 110 and controls the emission of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launching device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

  The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program and the like, a payout RAM 121c that is a work area for the arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs a calculation process regarding payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and provides a game ball payout device. 100, and transmits a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

  The input ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101. The payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to an output port of the payout control unit 121.

  When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 controls the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and controls the payout ball detection switch 100a. When the payout of the predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control for paying out the game balls ends.

  The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input port, an output port, and the like. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b. ing.

  When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b are energized. When detecting that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed according to the detection signal from the firing volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven, and the firing is performed so that the firing intensity becomes in accordance with the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. The game ball is fired by driving the use solenoid 28b.

  The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft, and the launching member 28 is rotated by rotating the rotating shaft to launch the game ball A. . Since the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, the game ball is fired for one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

  The effect control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls an effect related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes an effect control unit 130m including a sub CPU 130a for performing an operation process, a sub ROM 130b in which an effect control program is stored, and a sub RAM 130c serving as a work area during the operation process, and a first image display device 70 (main A display / audio control unit 140 for controlling the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, and the blowing device A lamp / drive control unit 150 that controls the lighting device 21, the board illumination device 74, the board drive device 75, and the like, and an input port and an output port for effect control are provided.

  The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs an operation process related to the performance while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, so that the command received from the main control board 110 In response to input signals from the control button 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects ( Output data and commands).

  The effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. In the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, a process for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

  The display / voice control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. And controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

  The display / voice control unit 140 includes an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 storing an overall control program, an overall control unit 141 including an overall RAM 144 that is a work area for the arithmetic processing, and a VDP (VDP as an image processor). An image control unit 145 including a video display processor, a CGROM 146 storing image data and the like, and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 and temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. VRAM 147, a voice control unit 148 as a voice processor, a voice ROM 149 storing voice data and the like, and an input / output port.

  The overall CPU 142 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the overall ROM 143, and performs an arithmetic process relating to the effect while utilizing the overall RAM 144 as a work area, thereby receiving from the effect controller 130m. In accordance with an effect instruction command or the like, control is performed to cause the image control unit 145 and the audio control unit 148 to execute various effects (data and commands are output).

  The general ROM 143 is configured by a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list including a group of drawing control commands, and animation of the effect pattern. Animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

  The animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation constituting the specific contents of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes a weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method , The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) include various information such as a duty ratio which is a parameter of luminance.

  The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various types of image data are stored, and commands (display lists, drawing commands, etc.) from the general control unit 141 (the general CPU 142) and the CGROM 146 are stored in the CGROM 146. Drawing data that is a source of a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the image data. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), for example, an effect design image, a background image constituting the background of the effect design. , Character images, and dialogue images. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (overlapping) individual images.

  The CGROM 146 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like. The CGROM 146 compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read out in image data units by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

  Further, the CGROM 146 stores, without compressing, palette data in which color number information designating a color number and display color information for actually displaying a color are associated with each other. Note that the CGROM 146 may have a configuration in which not all image data is compressed, but only part of the image data. As the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 147 is configured by an SRAM that writes or reads image data at high speed. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the central control unit 141 (the central CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub-display). (Liquid crystal).

  The frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are switched alternately between a “drawing frame buffer” and a “display frame buffer” each time drawing is started.

  Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) transfers the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 to the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on an instruction (display list) from the general control unit 141 (the general CPU 142). , Read drawing data from the “display frame buffer” in the frame buffer area, generate a video signal (such as an RGB signal) based on the read drawing data, and generate a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Then, the image is output to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

  The image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operation clock from a crystal oscillator. By dividing the frequency of the operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) Output to In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (display of an image) is performed 30 times per second. 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) may be set so that 60 drawing (image display) is performed per second.

  Further, a general-purpose device that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs the image data between the image control unit 145 and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The substrate 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function for converting the image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) for displaying image data. For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) is connected is described. Absorb.

  The sound control unit 148 is connected to the sound output device 9, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), and the like from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the two-image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

  The lamp / drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a for performing arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b in which a lamp / drive control program is stored, a lamp RAM 150c serving as a work area for the arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

  The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp / drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs an arithmetic process relating to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In accordance with the received instruction command and the like, control is performed to output a predetermined effect to controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices (data and commands are output).

  The frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the blower device 21, and the panel lighting device 74 are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp / drive control unit, and the production control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a ) On the basis of various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the lighting device for the frame, the handle light emitting device 15c, and the lighting of the various LEDs of the panel lighting device 74, thereby performing a light emitting effect and the like. In addition, an operation effect (moving effect described above) or the like is performed by controlling the driving of the button driving device 17b, the blowing device 21, and the driving source such as the motor and the solenoid of the panel driving device 75.

  The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operation power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, To the effect control board 130 and various electronic components). A power-off detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power-off (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power-off detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power-off (power failure); A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure) is provided.

  The power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and various electronic components), and an OFF state in which the power supply is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a store clerk. When the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

  The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1 and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a in which the power interruption detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power interruption detection signal is in a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

  The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the gaming machine. When a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110 c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is turned off (power failure), and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power was turned off (power failure) after recovery from the power failure (power failure). Can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, a game state when the game proceeds will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the special symbol jackpot lottery has a “low-probability gaming state” and a “high-probability gaming state”, and the state relating to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 is “non-time-saving game”. State "and" time saving game state ".

In the present embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is a "low-probability gaming state" and a "non-time-saving gaming state" (2) A low-probability time-saving gaming state that is a "low-probability gaming state" and a "time-saving gaming state" (3) " High-probability time reduction game state that is "high probability game state" and "time reduction game state"

  Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "low-probability non-time saving gaming state". In the present embodiment, this gaming state is referred to as a "normal gaming state". ". In the present embodiment, the “low-probability time-saving game state” and the “high-probability time-saving game state” may be referred to as “specific game state” because the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. .

  In the present embodiment, the “low-probability gaming state” refers to a special symbol jackpot lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. This means a gaming state in which the winning probability is set as low as 1/299, for example. On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low-probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set to, for example, 1 / 59.8 as high. . Therefore, in the “high-probability gaming state”, it is easier to win a jackpot than in the “low-probability gaming state”. It is to be noted that the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after a jackpot game described later is completed.

  In the present embodiment, a jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as a “probable jackpot”. The jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is referred to as “normal jackpot”.

  In the present embodiment, the “non-time-saving gaming state” refers to the average fluctuation of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the ordinary symbol winning lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes through the ordinary symbol gate 44. This refers to a game state in which the time is set to be longer than the “time-saving game state” and the opening time of the second start-up port 47 when the winning is easily set is short. For example, when a game ball passes through the ordinary symbol gate 44, a normal symbol hit lottery is performed, and the ordinary symbol display unit 62 performs an ordinary symbol variation display. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be in an open state for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the ordinary symbol.

  On the other hand, the “time reduction gaming state” means that in a regular lottery of a normal symbol performed on condition that a game ball passes through the general symbol gate 44, an average variation time of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result is determined. A game state that is set shorter than the “non-time-saving game state” and that is longer than the “non-time-saving game state”, for example, the opening time of the second starting port 47 at the time of winning is 2.5 seconds, for example. Say Further, in the "non-time-saving game state", the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is set to, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving game state", the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is set to, for example, 127. / 128 is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving game state", when the game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled to the open mode than in the "non-time saving game state". Thereby, in the "time saving game state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming the game ball.

  In the embodiment, the “time saving game state” is advantageous in the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery, as compared with the “non-time saving game state”. It is set as follows. However, the “time saving gaming state” may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery becomes advantageous. . In the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning a win in a normal symbol win lottery may be, for example, 0/128.

(Type of jackpot)
Next, the types of jackpots will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as the types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, “first jackpot”, “second jackpot” and “third jackpot” are set. The types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 include “first jackpot” and “second jackpot”.

  The “first jackpot” is a first jackpot game in which the round winning opening 50 is opened up to 29.5 seconds and then the round winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds to perform a round game up to 10 times. It is a jackpot. In the round game, one round game ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the special winning opening 50 before the opening time elapses.

  After the end of the first big hit game, a high-precision time-saving game state is set until the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are changed and displayed 10,000 times. Therefore, the next jackpot is substantially determined based on the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state.

  The “second jackpot” is a jackpot for executing a second jackpot game in which a round game is executed up to ten times. After the end of the second big hit game, a low-probability time-saving game state is set until the change display of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

  The “third jackpot” is a jackpot for executing a third jackpot game in which a round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third big hit game, the high-precision time-saving game state is set until the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are changed and displayed 10,000 times. Therefore, the next jackpot is substantially determined based on the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state.

  It should be noted that the number of variable display times (in the present embodiment, the above-described 100 times and 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-precision time-short game state, low-probability time-short game state) set after the jackpot game is referred to as “high probability”. It may be expressed as "number of times" or "number of times saved".

  In the present embodiment, three types of jackpots are used. However, the number of types is not limited to three, and may be smaller or larger than three. Further, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 is 29.5 seconds regardless of the jackpot (the first jackpot to the third jackpot). However, the opening time does not have to be 29.5 seconds, and depending on the round game. Different opening times may be used.

(Type of hit)
Next, the types of hits will be described.

  In the present embodiment, there are "first hit" and "second hit" as types of hits that can be won in the hit lottery based on the passing of the game ball to the general-purpose gate 44, and the hit lottery is executed. If the gaming state at the time of the game is a non-time saving game state, it is "first hit", and if the gaming state at the time of winning lottery is the time saving game state, it is "second hit".

  The “first hit” is a hit in which a first hit game in which the second starting port 47 is opened up to a maximum of 0.2 seconds is executed. That is, it is a game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

  The "second hit" is a second hit game in which the second starting port 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. . In other words, it is a game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

  In addition, in the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins in the special winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

  As described above, in the “time saving game state”, the game balls are more likely to win at the second starting port 47, and the player can advantageously play the game without consuming the game balls than in the “non-time saving game state”. It is possible to proceed.

  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110.

  When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process. More specifically, a startup program is read from the main ROM 110b in response to power-on, and a process of initializing flags and the like stored in the main RAM 110c is performed.

  In step S20, the main CPU 110a updates the reach determination random number value for determining the special symbol variation mode (variation time) and the special symbol determination random value. An initial value random value updating process for updating the initial value random value, the special symbol determining initial value random value, the hit determination initial value random value, and the normal symbol determining initial value random value is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines in step S40 whether or not a power interruption (power failure) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S20, and If a signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S41.

  The main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting a timer interrupt in a step S41, performs a process of clearing an output port in a step S42, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c in a step S43, and stores it in a predetermined memory. In step S44, a process of turning on a backup flag to be referred to at the time of restoration from a power failure is performed, and in step S45, a process of prohibiting RAM access is performed. Wait until drooped.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the main control board 110 at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds).

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter for opening the special electric accessory, and the like. , An ordinary symbol time counter, an opening and closing time of the movable member 48, and the like, and a time control process for updating various timer counters. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, or a starting opening closing timer counter is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines the random number for the jackpot determination, the random number for the special symbol determination, the random number for the special figure variation pattern, the random number for the hit determination, the random number for the normal symbol determination, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination. A specific random number updating process for updating the random number value for use is performed. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, The new random number value is newly updated by setting the initial random number value to be used as a new round initial value.

  In step S130, the main CPU 110a converts the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random number value for special symbol determination, the initial value random number value for hit determination, and the initial value random number value for ordinary symbol determination in the same manner as in step S30. An initial value random value updating process to be updated is performed.

  In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the special winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, and the like. It is determined whether or not an input has been made to various switches, and an input control process for setting predetermined data when an input has been made is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination (eg, jackpot determination), display control of special symbols, opening / closing control of the special winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), control of a game state, and the like. Perform processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol memory control process (such as a hit determination), a normal symbol display control, and a general symbol power control process for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 47 (the movable member 48). .

  Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or award ball counters (three award ball counters, A payout control process for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 is performed with reference to the 10 award ball counters and the 15 award ball counters. Thereby, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

  In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and specifies a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation. A magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130 is performed. Note that, when the effect control board 130 receives the error designation command for magnetic abnormality and the error designation command for radio wave abnormality, it performs control for reporting a magnetic abnormality error and a radio wave abnormality error.

  The main CPU 110a, in step S700, external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, starting opening / closing data output to the second starting opening / closing solenoid 48b, and large output to the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening / closing data, special symbol display data to be output to the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold display 63, A data creation process for creating data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to the second special symbol hold display 64 and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65 is performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs a port output process for outputting signals such as the external information data, the start opening / closing data, and the special winning opening / closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. Display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol hold display data and normal symbol hold display data, and payout command transmission processing for sending a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. In addition, an output control process of executing an effect command transmission process of transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

  Note that the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an input control process in the main control board 110.

  In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has won the general winning opening 43. If there is no input of a detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

  When the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the data indicating the 10 winning balls is updated by adding the data indicating the 10 winning balls to the general winning opening counter (10 winning ball counters) used for the winning balls. Then, after adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of gaming balls entering the winning port and updating (D ← D + 1), the general winning port detection switch input processing is terminated.

  In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. In the special winning opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not a game ball has won the special winning opening 50. If no detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

  When the detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, the data indicating the 15 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (15 prize ball counters) for the special winning opening used for the prize balls. Is updated, and "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of gaming balls entering the winning opening to update (D ← D + 1), and whether or not the current gaming state is in the special gaming state Is determined. When the current game state is the special game state, "1" is added to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have won the special winning opening 50 and updated (C ← C + 1). Then, the special winning opening detection switch input processing ends.

  If the current gaming state is not in the special gaming state, an illegal winning ball indicating the number of gaming balls that have won (entered) a specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winable period. The counter (E) is updated by adding “1” (E ← E + 1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the illegal winning prize counter (E) is greater than a prescribed number (for example, 10). When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or smaller than the specified number, the special winning opening detection switch input processing ends.

  If the value of the illegal prize ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number, an illegal prize (illegal prize ball) is designated as an illegal prize (illegal prize ball) in which a game ball wins (enters) outside the prize period. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the illegal winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the fact that the effect controlling board 130 notifies the improper winning error is notified that an improper winning has occurred.

  Then, the external information data (output data) for outputting the illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the special winning opening detection is performed. The switch input processing ends. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and an external device can recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

  In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In the first starting port detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting port detection switch input process. In the second start-up opening detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first start-up opening detection switch input process shown in FIG. 6 described later is performed.

  In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process. In this gate detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the ordinary figure gate 44. If the detection signal has not been input from the gate detection switch 44a, the gate detection switch input processing ends.

  When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary figure holdings, which is the number of ordinary figure holdings stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area, is less than four. If the number of ordinary drawing reservations is not less than 4, the gate detection switch input processing ends.

  If the number of reserved ordinary figures is less than 4, add “1” to the number of reserved ordinary figures and update it. Then, the random number for hit determination, the random number for determining the normal symbol, and the random number for determining the general figure variation pattern are updated. The obtained random number value is retrieved sequentially from the first storage unit in the normally stored symbol storage area, and the obtained random number value is stored in the empty storage unit, and the gate detection switch input processing ends.

  The main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation detection switch input process in step S260. In this prize confirmation detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the prize confirmation detection switch 52a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the prize ball flow path 52. If the detection signal has not been input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the input control process ends.

  When a detection signal is input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the winning ball counter (D) is updated by subtracting “1” (D ← D−1), and the value of the winning ball counter (D) is set to the upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the value falls within a range between 20) and a lower limit (for example, -10).

  If the value of the winning ball counter (D) is not within the range between the upper limit value and the lower limit value, it is determined that an abnormal winning (winning) has occurred, and the error specifying command for abnormal winning is stored in the transmission data storage area for effect. The external information data (output data) for outputting the abnormal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the winning ball counter (D) is cleared, and the winning confirmation detecting switch is set. The input processing ends. The sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the abnormal winning error designation command notifies an abnormal winning error to notify that an abnormal winning has occurred.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
With reference to FIG. 6, the first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 45a. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the process proceeds to step S230-2. 1 Start port detection switch input processing ends.

  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a adds and updates the data indicating the three winning balls to the three winning ball counters used for the winning balls, and in step S230-3, wins the winning opening ( "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have been (entered) and updated (D ← D + 1).

  In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol hold number (U1), which is the number of first hold memories stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, is less than four. . If the first special symbol hold number (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5. If the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not less than 4, the first start of the current operation is performed. The mouth detection switch input processing ends.

  In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding “1” to the first special symbol hold number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, updating the first special symbol after update. A first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the symbol hold number (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information (the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for determining special figure variation pattern), An empty storage unit is sequentially searched from the first storage unit in the symbol holding storage area, and the acquired special figure determination information is stored in the empty storage unit.

  As described above, the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area stores the special figure determination information (the random number for the jackpot determination, the random number for the special symbol determination, the random number for the reach determination, and the special figure variation pattern determination). 1) is stored.

  The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-8. In the first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (first hold storage) acquired this time is displayed before the special symbol variation display based on the determination information is performed. Judgment is performed, and a planned variation pattern that is a variation pattern to be executed is determined.

  In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets a first starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process in step S230-8 in the effect transmission data storage area. The first starting port detection switch input processing is ended.

  As a result, the scheduled variation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start opening winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first starting opening winning designation command makes the first start opening winning. The designated command is analyzed, and a predetermined announcement effect is provided from before the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the first starting port winning designation command is started to one or a plurality of variation displays executed before that. Can be executed. The prefetch notice effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the movable effect member 73, and the board lighting device 74.

  The second starting port detection switch input process includes the first starting port detection switch 45a, the first special symbol holding storage area, the first holding storage, the first special symbol holding number (U1), and the first special symbol storing designation. The command, the first preliminary determination process, and the first starting opening winning designation command are respectively transmitted to the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the second special symbol holding storage area, the second holding storage, the second special symbol holding number (U2), It may be replaced with a special symbol storage designation command, a second pre-judgment processing, and a second starting opening winning designation command.

(Special figure special power control processing of main control board)
With reference to FIG. 7, the special figure special electric power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the special figure special power control processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special power processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special power processing data loaded in step S302, and stores the special symbol if the special figure special power processing data = 0. The process proceeds to the determination process (step S310). If the special figure special power process data = 1, the process proceeds to the special symbol variation process (step S320). If the special figure special power process data = 2, the special symbol stop process (step S310). The process proceeds to S330). If the special figure special power processing data = 3, the process proceeds to the big hit game processing (step S340). If the special figure special power processing data = 4, the process proceeds to the big hit game end processing (step S350). Move.

  This "special figure special power processing data" is set as needed in each subroutine of the special figure special power control processing as described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. .

  In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol storage determination process of determining a big hit, determining a type of a special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and determining a variation time of the special symbol.

  Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol holding number (U2) is equal to or more than "1", and if the second special symbol holding number (U2) is not equal to or more than "1". It is determined whether or not the first special symbol hold number (U1) is equal to or greater than "1", and if the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not equal to or greater than "1" ("0"). Determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not the special symbol variation display and the customer winning state in which the big hit game is not executed is the customer waiting state determination flag is “0”.

  When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is determined that the customer waiting state has started, the customer waiting state designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect, and the special figure special power processing data = 0 is maintained. When the special symbol storage determination process is completed and the customer waiting state determination flag is not “0”, it is assumed that the customer waiting state has already been started and the special figure special power processing data = 0 is maintained. The current special symbol storage determination process ends.

  When the second special symbol hold number (U2) is equal to or more than “1”, “1” is subtracted from the value stored in the second special symbol hold storage area, and then the value is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area. The various random number values (special figure determination information) stored in a certain first storage unit to fourth storage unit are shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the second random number corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after the subtraction. 2. Set a special symbol storage designation command in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination for determining whether to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, the random number for special symbol determination among the various random numbers (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the zeroth storage unit in the second special symbol holding storage area, and the current probability Based on the gaming state (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state), it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "losing" in which a big hit game is to be executed.

  On the other hand, if the second special symbol hold number (U2) is not equal to or greater than “1” and the first special symbol hold number (U1) is equal to or greater than “1”, the first special symbol hold storage area is used. After subtracting “1” from the stored value, the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol holding storage area are shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, A first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) after the subtraction is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination for determining whether to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, the random number for special symbol determination among the various random numbers (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the zeroth storage unit in the first special symbol holding storage area, and the current probability Based on the gaming state (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state), it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "losing" in which a big hit game is to be executed.

  Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area, the large hit determination is stored in the 0th storage unit. A special jackpot symbol or a special losing symbol is determined based on the random number value for the jackpot symbol, and an effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

  When the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area, the big hit symbol stored in the 0th storage unit is used. A special symbol (big hit special symbol, losing special symbol) is determined based on the random number value, and an effect symbol designating command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in an effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area, the large hit determination is stored in the 0th storage unit. Based on the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation random number value, a variation pattern of a special symbol is determined, and a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in a special symbol time counter. The corresponding variation pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  When the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the zero storage unit of the first special symbol storage area, the reach determination unit stored in the zero storage unit is used. A random pattern value and a special pattern fluctuation pattern are determined based on the special figure fluctuation random number value, a fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in a special symbol time counter, and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set. The specified command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Then, the main CPU 110a sets, in a predetermined processing area, variable display data for causing the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to perform a variable display (LED blinking) of the special symbol. .

  Accordingly, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. The variable display of the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is performed.

  Then, the special figure special power processing data = 0 is set to the special figure special power processing data = 1, and preparations are made to proceed to a subroutine of the special symbol variation processing, and the current special symbol storage determination processing ends.

  In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol change process of determining whether or not the change time of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol fluctuation processing of this time is terminated while maintaining the special figure special power processing data = 1.

  When the fluctuating time has elapsed, the special symbol determined in step S310 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 as the jackpot special symbol or the losing special symbol. Then, a predetermined special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) is set in the special symbol time counter. Thereby, the determination result of the jackpot determination is notified to the player.

  Then, the special figure special power processing data = 1 is set to the special figure special power processing data = 2, and preparations are made to proceed to the special symbol stop processing subroutine, and the current special symbol variation processing is ended.

  In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process for determining whether or not the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop processing of this time is ended while maintaining the special figure special power processing data = 2.

  When the stop time has elapsed, when the number of time savings is greater than 0, 1 is subtracted from the time savings counter and updated. When the number of time savings = 0, the time saving game flag is cleared. The probability counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the probability counter, and when the high probability count = 0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

  Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a special jackpot symbol. In the case of a special jackpot symbol, the time-saving game flag, the high-probability game flag, the time-saving number counter, and the high-probability number counter are cleared, and the special figure special power processing data is set from 2 to the special figure special power processing data 3. Then, preparations are made to proceed to the jackpot game processing subroutine, and the current special symbol stop processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the case of a lost special symbol, the special figure special power processing data = 2 is set to the special figure special power processing data = 0, and preparations are made to proceed to a subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing. To end.

  In step S340, the main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game based on the type of the special jackpot symbol (stop symbol data) set in step S310. Perform jackpot game processing.

  Specifically, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 according to the type of the big hit game is set in a special game timer counter, and the driving data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening / closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the number of round games (R) storage area.

  If a specified number of game balls win (enter) during this opening, or if the opening time of the special winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10 or special game timer counter = 0), a large The output of the drive data of the winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening / closing member 51. Thereby, one round game ends. Further, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

  When a predetermined number of round games (4 or 16 times in the present embodiment) are completed, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3. , The special map special power processing data is set to 4, and preparations are made to proceed to the jackpot game end processing subroutine, and the current jackpot game processing is ended.

  In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines any one of the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state and determines any of the time-saving gaming states or the non-time-saving gaming states. A jackpot game end process is performed.

  Specifically, based on the type of the special jackpot symbol (stop symbol data) set in step S310, the setting of the high-probability game flag, the setting of the high-probability count, the setting of the time-short game flag, and the setting of the time-short count are Then, the special figure special power processing data = 4 is set to the special figure special power processing data = 0, and preparations are made to shift to a subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and the current big hit game end processing is ended.

(Explanation of commands related to production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from main control board 110 to effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 are diagrams illustrating types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

  The “first special symbol storage designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, and “MODE” is set to “E0H”, and the number of reserved memories is set. Is set in accordance with.

  This first special symbol storage designation command is used when the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area increases or decreases in the step S230-11 or the step S310. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

  The “second special symbol storage designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area. “MODE” is set to “E0H”, and the number of reserved memories is set. Is set in accordance with.

  When the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is increased or decreased, the second special symbol storage designation command is set to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease in step S240 or step S310. The corresponding second special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

  In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol storage designation command" and the "second special symbol storage designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "special symbol storage designation command".

  The “effect design specification command” indicates the type (type) of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. For the first special symbol, “MODE” is set to “E1H”, and for the second special symbol, “MODE” is set. Is set as "E2H", and the information of DATA is set according to the type of the special symbol. Since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of the jackpot and the game state after the end of the jackpot, it can be said that the effect symbol designation command indicates the type of the jackpot and the game state after the end of the jackpot. .

  In the effect design designation command, when various special symbols are determined and the special symbol change display is started, the effect design designation command corresponding to the special symbol is stored in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of the step S800.

  The “first special symbol variation pattern designation command” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, and “MODE” is set to “E3H”, and various variations are set. DATA information is set according to the pattern.

  The first special symbol variation pattern designation command is used when the first special symbol display device 60 starts displaying the special symbol variation, and in the step S310, the first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern. The pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61. "MODE" is set to "E4H", and various variations are set. DATA information is set according to the pattern.

  The second special symbol variation pattern designation command is used when the special symbol variation display of the second special symbol display 61 is started, and the second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern is set in step S310. The pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol variation pattern designation command” and the “second special symbol variation pattern designation command” may be collectively referred to as a “variation pattern designation command”.

  The "special symbol determination command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E5H" and "DATA" is set to "00H".

  When the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 in the special symbol determination command, the special symbol determination command is applied to the effect transmission data in the main RAM 110c in step S320. It is set in the storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The “ordinary symbol confirmation command” indicates that the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and “MODE” is set to “E5H” and “DATA” is set to “01H”.

  When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, the normal symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

The “starting port winning designation command” is information for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) in advance. If the command is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45, “MODE” Is set as "E6H", and if the game is based on winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47, "MODE" is set as "E7H", and information of DATA is set in accordance with various kinds of winning information. I have.

  This starting opening winning designation command is a starting opening winning designation corresponding to the starting winning information in step S230-10 or S240 when a game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The “big hit opening designation command” indicates that various big hit games (special game state) start, “MODE” is set to “E8H”, and information of DATA is set according to the type of big hit game. Is set.

  When the various jackpot games start, a jackpot opening designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S330. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of (1).

  The “round designation command” indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, “MODE” is set to “E9H”, and information of DATA is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

  When the round game of the jackpot game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340, and the output control process of step S800 is performed. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “big hit ending designation command” indicates that various big hit games have been completed, and “MODE” is set to “EAH”, and DATA information is set according to the type of the big hit game.

  When the various jackpot games end, the jackpot ending designation command sets the jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot game to the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of (1).

  The “ordinary symbol storage designation command” indicates the number of retained symbols stored in the ordinary symbol reserved number (G1) storage area, and “MODE” is set to “ECH”. Information is set.

  When the value stored in the ordinary symbol hold number (G1) storage area increases or decreases, the ordinary symbol storage designation command corresponds to the ordinary symbol corresponding to the increased / decreased stored number in step S250 or step S400. The storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The “ordinary symbol designation command” indicates the type of the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 62, and “MODE” is set to “EDH”, and the information of DATA is set according to the type of the ordinary symbol. Is set.

  When the ordinary design is determined, various ordinary symbols are determined, and when the variable display of the ordinary symbols is started, the ordinary symbol designation command corresponding to the ordinary symbols is stored in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of the step S800.

  The "normal figure change designation command" indicates the change time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62. "MODE" is set to "EEH", and the information of DATA is set in accordance with the change time of the various normal symbols. Is set.

  When the ordinary symbol variation designation command is started, the ordinary symbol variation designation command corresponding to the ordinary symbol variation time is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400. , In the output control process of step S800.

  The "winning opening designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games are started, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and data information is set according to the type of the auxiliary game.

  When the auxiliary game is started, the winning opening designation command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400. It is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing.

  The “winning ending designation command” indicates that various auxiliary games have been completed, “MODE” is set to “EFH”, and information of DATA is set according to the type of the auxiliary game.

  At the end of the various auxiliary games, the winning ending specification command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400. In the output control process of S800, the image is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “game state designation command” indicates whether or not the game mode is the time-saving game state or the high-probability game state. “MODE” is set to “F0H”, and “MODE” is set according to each game state. DATA "is set.

  This game state designation command is set to the game state in the step S310, the step S330, and the step S350 at the start of the special symbol change, at the end of the special symbol change (at the start of the big hit game) and at the end of the big hit. The corresponding game state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  The “power-on designation command” and the “power-restoration designation command” indicate whether or not the power-on to the gaming machine 1 involves initialization of the main RAM 110c, and “MODE” is “F1H”. When the main RAM 110c is initialized, “DATA” is set to “00H”, and when the main RAM 110c is not initialized, “DATA” is set to “01H-03H”.

  The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are, when the game machine 1 is powered on, whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized in step S10 and a power-on designation command corresponding to the game state. Alternatively, a power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “customer waiting state designation command” indicates that the customer waiting state in which the special symbol change display is not performed, and “MODE” is set to “F1H” and DATA is set to “04H”. ing.

  This customer waiting state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the above step S310 when the customer waiting state in which the special symbol change display is not performed, and in the output control process of step S800. This will be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “error designation command” indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, “MODE” is set to “F2H”, and information of “DATA” is set according to the type of error.

  This error designation command is used when the occurrence of a magnetic or radio wave abnormality is determined in the magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination processing in step S600, and when the occurrence of an abnormal prize is determined in the prize confirmation detection switch input processing in step S260. When it is determined in the above-described step S220 that the large winning opening detection switch is input or the second startup opening detection switch is input in step S240, that the occurrence of an illegal winning is determined, the error designation command corresponding to the type of the error is sent to the main RAM 110c. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of step S800.

  When the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 are opened, the lower tray 12 is full, and a payout abnormality is detected on the payout control board 120, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the payout RAM 121c for effect transmission. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of the payout control board 120.

  The “error release designation command” indicates that the error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, “MODE” is set to “F2H”, and information of “DATA” is set according to the type of the resolved error. Is set.

  This error canceling designation command is used when the closing of the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4, the elimination of the fullness of the lower tray 12, and the elimination of the abnormal dispense are detected in the dispense control board 120. The corresponding error cancellation designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of the payout control board 120.

(Main processing of effect control unit 130m)
Next, a main process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control unit 130m.

  When a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

  The sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting the timer interrupt in step E10, and performs an initialization process in step E20. More specifically, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b in response to power-on, the flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initialization is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a sets an interruption permission for permitting the timer interruption in step E30, and performs a sub random number updating process in step E40. Specifically, a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 130c is performed. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of effect control unit 130m)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the effect control unit 130m.

  The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs a timer update process in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

  The sub CPU 130a performs an input control process in Step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a have been input, and a process of setting predetermined data when the input has been performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process in Step E150. Specifically, it is determined whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and a process of storing the received command in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted is performed. Do.

  The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in Step E200. Specifically, it determines whether or not a power-on designation command has been received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if so, performs processing for performing power-on notification. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), The power output sound is output from the audio output device 9.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a power failure recovery process in Step E250. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the power restoration designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing for performing power failure restoration notification. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a power restoration screen, For example, the sound output device 9 outputs a power restoration sound.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect process in step E300. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer wait state designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. If the command has been received, a customer wait effect is given after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 20 seconds). Perform processing to perform. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , Or output a waiting sound for a customer from the audio output device 9.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in a step E350. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not a game state designation command has been received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and updating the game state information stored in the sub RAM 130c when the command has been received is described. Do.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in Step E400. Specifically, it is determined with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command has been received. A process for updating the number of 1 special symbol reservation, the number of second special symbol reservation, the number of ordinary symbol reservation, and the like is performed.

  Sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect process in step E500. Specifically, it is determined with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c whether or not the starting opening winning designation command or the variation pattern designation command has been received. If the command has been received, processing relating to the icon change effect is performed.

  The icon change effect is a kind of a look-ahead notice effect in which the hold icon and the display mode of the icon are changed, and details thereof will be described later. However, the change timing and the change mode (normal change, symbol effect change, and character change) Action change) is set in plural types. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold icon may be referred to as a “hold icon change effect” and the icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as the “icon change effect”.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a special figure special power production process in step E600. More specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, a rendering symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol determination command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, and the like. Is determined, and if received, processing for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

  The sub-CPU 130a performs a general-purpose general-purpose production process in step E800. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a general figure designating command, a general figure change designating command, a general design confirmation command, a winning opening designating command, a winning ending designating command, and the like are received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Is determined, and if received, processing for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

  Sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process in step E850. Specifically, it is determined whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command has been received. Is performed, or processing for terminating the error notification effect corresponding to the received error release designation command is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in Step E900. Specifically, a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data or transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display / audio control unit 140 or the lamp / drive control unit 150 is performed. .

  In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Icon change effect processing of effect control unit 130m)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

  In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process of determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step E520, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process for updating (changing) the display mode of the icons already displayed (the hold icon and the icon), and ends the current icon change effect process. I do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Icon change effect determination processing of effect control unit 130m)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

  In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a start opening winning designation command has been received. If the start-port winning designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E510-2. If the starting-port winning designation command has not been received, the current icon change effect determination process ends.

  In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start-up winning specification command to determine whether or not a big hit has occurred, the type of the big hit game, and the effect contents (scheduled variation pattern).

  In step E510-3, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is within the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is the icon change effect executable period, the process proceeds to step E510-4. If it is not the icon change effect executable period, the current icon change effect determination process ends.

  The executable period of the icon change effect indicates that the jackpot game is not being executed, that the icon change effect is not being executed, or that the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two of the above conditions may be provided. Further, conditions different from the above three conditions may be adopted.

  In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines that all of the preliminary determination results of the preliminary reservation (reservation storage corresponding to the previously received starting opening winning designation command) are equal to or less than the normal reach, that is, the preliminary determination results of the preliminary reservation are all normal fluctuations, It is determined whether or not a shortened variation or a normal reach has occurred. If it is not more than normal reach, the process moves to step E510-5, and if not all is below normal reach, the process moves to step E510-8.

  The sub CPU 130a acquires a random number for icon display mode determination for determining the final display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in step E510-5, and in step E510-6. , An icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 14) for determining the final icon display mode. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

  The sub CPU 130a determines an icon final display mode in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14 and, based on the starting port winning designation command and the icon display mode determination random value, displays a plurality of icon final display modes. To determine one icon final display mode.

  In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon) as the normal display mode as the icon final display mode.

  In step E510-9, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) for executing an icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process proceeds to step E510-10. If it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process proceeds to step E510-13.

  In step E510-10, sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 15) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. The change scenario indicates a transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance of the hold icon.

  In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets the change scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the icon final display mode and the selection rate with reference to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG.

  In step E510-12, sub CPU 130a specifies a winning icon, which is an icon display mode displayed first on first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and determines the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing ends. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is changed to the first icon. The image is displayed on the image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or a predetermined sound effect is output.

  In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets the scenario in the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

  In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination processing. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed in the first image. It is displayed on the device 70 (main liquid crystal) or a predetermined sound effect is output.

  In the icon change effect determination process according to the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all of the preliminary determination results of the preceding reservation are equal to or less than the normal reach. Alternatively, the icon change effect may be executed when the advance determination result of the advance reservation does not perform the reach effect, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the reach effect is performed. With this configuration, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon is not displayed during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the reach effect is not performed. Changes in the display mode of, the reach effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, even if the preliminary determination result of the preliminary reservation includes the one that performs the reach effect, the icon change production may be performed, but the preliminary determination result of the preliminary reservation includes the one that performs the reach effect. The icon change effect may be easier to be performed (is performed at a higher rate) when no icon effect is included than when the reach effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

  In the icon final display mode determination table, the type of the start-up winning specification command, the icon display mode determination random value, and the icon final display mode to be selected are associated, and the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. The icon display mode determination random value is allocated such that

  The icon final display mode includes a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character as special icons indicating that there is a possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game is executed). Icons are set.

  The jackpot winning expectation degree related to the special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that is determined to be a big hit. .

  Here, as a main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14, the selection rate of the icon final display mode is made different depending on the effect content. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the production content is SP start or specific start winning information indicating that it is SPSP reach, it is determined that the production content is a normal variation, a shortened variation, and a normal reach that does not reach the production. The character icon is selected at a higher rate than the normal start winning information shown.

  In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14, the CD icon is not selected as the icon final display mode in the case of a jackpot, but may be selected.

(Change scenario decision table)
FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

  In the change scenario determination table, the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each scenario, and the type of the change scenario to be selected are associated. For reference, a prior change in each change scenario and an update mode in the change are described.

  Here, the “pre-variation” refers to a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command. That is, the “fluctuation” refers to a fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command.

  In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during execution of the advance change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is not changed). A scenario (for example, scenario 02 etc.) which is not executed, or the display mode of the icon is changed during execution of the advance change and during execution of the change (the pending icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed) ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

  In the change scenario determination table according to the present embodiment, a scenario that changes the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not a reach effect (may be a reach other than the normal reach) is performed in the pre-change. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by a change scenario determination table that determines whether or not a reach effect indicating that there is a possibility that a jackpot game may be executed in advance fluctuation is performed. The scenario to be performed may be determined. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the icon is not changed during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that a change in the display mode occurs. In addition, a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is performed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not performed. Various scenarios may be set so that the icon display mode changes at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which is not executed.

(Update process of icon display mode of effect control unit 130m)
The icon display mode updating process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an icon display mode updating process in the effect control unit 130m.

  In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received. If the variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E520-2. If the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the current icon display mode update process ends.

  The sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c in step E520-2, and determines in step E520-3 whether there is a pending icon for changing (updating) the display mode. Is determined. If there is a hold icon for changing the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-4. If there is no hold icon for changing the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-7.

  In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table for the hold icon (see FIG. 17) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. The details of the change pattern determination table for the hold icon will be described later.

  Sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the hold icon shown in FIG. 17, based on the change mode of the hold icon in the present fluctuation effect and the selection rate (%), a plurality of the change patterns of the hold icon are set. To determine one pending icon change pattern.

  In step E520-6, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. As a result, the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) changes, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

  In Step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is the icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is such an icon that changes the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-8. If there is no such icon that changes the display mode, the current icon display mode update process ends.

  In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed from a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon in the current fluctuation effect. A change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 18 and 19) for the icon corresponding to the change stage at which the icon changes is selected. The details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

  The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in Step E520-9. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the icon shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 19, based on the icon change mode and the selectivity (%) in the current fluctuation effect, a plurality of the icon change patterns are selected. One icon change pattern is determined from the icon change patterns.

  In step E520-10, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon display mode update process. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing As a result, the display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) changes, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

(Change pattern determination table for pending icon)
FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a change pattern determination table for a hold icon that is referred to when determining a change pattern for a hold icon.

  The change pattern determination table for the reserved icon is associated with the form of the reserved icon change in the present fluctuation effect, the selection rate (%) of each reserved icon change pattern, and the type of the selected reserved icon change pattern. For reference, a change effect generation timing and a change stage of the hold icon in each hold icon change pattern are described.

  The change pattern of the hold icon includes a normal change pattern 01 in which, when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of change), the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect in response to the disappearance of the icon. Or a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during the change with the output of the sound effect, or an effect effect in which a character appears and acts on the icon with the character as a starting point, and the icon is displayed. A character action change pattern 01 in which the mode is changed, and a change notification symbol (special symbol) indicating that the display mode of the icon is changed as a result of the fluctuation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the change notification symbol is used as a starting point to act on the hold icon. A pattern effect change pattern 01 is set in which the effect effect is performed and the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been.

  The change effect generation timing of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and when the change effect is started (at the start of change), during the change effect is being executed (during change), and the effect design There is a time when 70a temporarily stops ((temporary) stop).

  The change stage of the hold icon includes 1UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon) for changing the jackpot winning expectation to a display mode one level higher, and a jackpot. A 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) that changes the winning expectation to a display mode two levels higher is set.

  Note that the change effect generation timings of the hold icon are the three timings described above, but are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, during the execution of the fluctuation effect until the reach is established (during the fluctuation), during the execution of the normal reach, during the execution of the SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
18 and 19 are diagrams illustrating a change pattern determination table for the icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon. FIG. 18 changes the display mode of the icon by one step. FIG. 19 is a table referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed in two stages.

  In the icon change pattern determination table, the icon change mode in the current fluctuation effect, the selectivity (%) of each icon change pattern, and the type of the selected icon change pattern are associated with each other. For reference, the change effect generation timing and the change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

  The icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes at the start of the change with the output of the sound effect, and a normal change pattern in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during the change with the output of the sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character effect change pattern 01 in which the appearance of a character and an effect effect acting on the icon starting from the character are performed to change the display mode of the icon are set.

  The change effect generation timing of the icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and when the change effect is started (at the start of change), during the change effect is being executed (during change), and the effect design is performed. There is a time when 70a temporarily stops ((temporary) stop).

  The icon change stages include a 1UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to a display mode one level higher, and a jackpot. 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon) that changes the winning expectation to a display mode two levels higher is set.

  In addition, in the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not selected, but may be selectable. For example, in a fluctuating effect in which a pseudo continuous effect is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped before the pseudo fluctuation is performed.

  Pseudo continuous production is a process in which a variation display of a production symbol is performed as if a plurality of renderings were performed in response to a jackpot determination based on winning (ball entry) to one starting opening (first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47). In order to make it appear as if it were done, all the effects are produced within the special figure fluctuation time determined for the winning (ball entry) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47). This is a specially-designed effect symbol variation display in which re-variation display in which the symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and variation is restarted is performed once or more than once.

  In addition, the change effect generation timing of the icon is the two timings described above, but is not limited to these timings, and another timing may be provided. For example, during the execution of the fluctuation effect until the reach is established (during the fluctuation), during the execution of the normal reach, during the execution of the SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Relationship of change effect occurrence frequency between change icon display mode and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 20A is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the occurrence frequency of the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing.

  When the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the variation pattern designation command. ing.

  Further, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. It is lower.

  In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command, the holding icon is displayed more frequently than when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command. Can easily be changed to a blue character icon.

  On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is greater at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. Is getting higher.

  Further, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the variation pattern designation command. It is lower.

  In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the variation pattern designation command, the icon is held more than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. Can easily be changed to a red character icon. Note that the predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command means that the game ball wins in the starting opening (the first starting opening 45 and the second starting opening 47) and the hold icon is displayed. The change effect (change effect at the time of winning) in which the hold icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing of the change, and the normal change pattern 01.
The change effects that occur at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command are the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01.

  Since the relationship of the change effect occurrence frequency between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the change pattern designation command is the predetermined command. Change effect that changes to a red character icon that has a higher jackpot expectation than the frame update timing according to the reception of the game, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is high, so the player can pay attention to the change effect occurrence timing, improving the interest of the game It is possible to do.

  In addition, the frequency of the change effect of changing to the blue character icon is higher at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the change pattern designation command, so In addition, although it is difficult to change to the red character icon with a high jackpot expectation degree, it is easy to change to the blue character icon, so that the player can pay attention to the subsequent fluctuating effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Relationship 1 between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 20B is a diagram illustrating a relationship 1 of a change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing.

  When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the pending icon change effect is higher than that of the icon change effect.

  Further, when a change effect occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is lower than that of the pending icon change effect.

  Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing with the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the hold icon is easy to change in the early stage of the change effect, so The player's expectation of the jackpot game can be pulled over a long period of time, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship 2 between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 20C is a diagram illustrating a relationship 2 of the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing.

  When a change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is higher than that of the pending icon change effect.

  Further, when a change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the pending icon change effect is lower than that of the icon change effect.

  Since the relationship between the change effect occurrence frequency and the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the icon is easy to change at a later time of the change effect, It is possible to improve the interest of the game by pulling the expectation of the player to the jackpot game until the late stage of the fluctuation effect.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon is generated (changed))
FIG. 20D is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

  When a CD icon is generated as a hold icon, a first generation notification sound is output as a notification sound when the icon is generated, and when a hold character and a blue character icon are generated (when the icon changes), A second generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at the time of icon generation (change), and when a hold icon and a red character icon are generated as the icon (when the icon changes), the icon generation ( A third generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound at the time of the change, and when the icon changes to the rainbow character icon, the fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is generated as the notification sound at the time of the icon change. Is set to be output.

  In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of a plurality of icon display modes (four types). However, a notification sound generated when a CD icon is generated, a blue character icon, and a red character icon , And a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character. Alternatively, the notification sound is not output when the CD icon is generated, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes to any one of the modes. You may make it output. Also, as for the rainbow character icon that is determined to be a big hit, three types may be provided by providing a dedicated change notification sound.

(Main processing of the general control unit 141)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141.

  When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the centralized CPU 142, and the centralized CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

  First, the supervising CPU 142 sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting a timer interrupt in step T1, and performs an initialization process in step T2. More specifically, the main processing program is read from the general ROM 143, and at the same time, flags and the like stored in the general RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

  In step T3, the overall CPU 142 sets an interruption permission for permitting the timer interruption. In step T4, the overall CPU 142 refers to the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144 to determine whether or not an effect instruction command has been received from the effect control unit 130m. If it is determined that the animation pattern has not been received, the process proceeds to step T7. If it has been received, the animation pattern is determined and set in step T5 from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received direction instruction command in step T5. To perform an animation pattern setting process.

  The effect instruction commands include a customer waiting effect command, an icon display command, a change effect command, a variable effect pattern command, a symbol stop pattern command, an opening effect pattern command, a round effect pattern command, an ending effect pattern command, and the like.

  The animation group includes the types of objects that make up the effect image, scenes (timing) and weight frames (display time) for displaying the effect image, target data (sprite image identification numbers, transfer source addresses, etc.), One or more animation patterns, which are information that defines (specifies) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and information specifying an image display device for displaying the effect image, are bundled. It is a group formed by being done.

  The types of animation groups include, for example, effect symbol groups for displaying animation of effect symbol 70a, icon groups for displaying an animation of the reserved icon and the icon, and animation of variable effect such as background and character. Fluctuating effect group, a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, a special game effect group for displaying an animation of a special game effect, and the like.

  In step T6, the overall CPU 142 performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from a type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is a frame update timing (to draw a new effect image). If there is no frame switching flag, the process proceeds to step T4, where the frame switching flag is set. If there is, in step T8, the frame switching flag is cleared.

  In step T9, the centralized CPU 142 performs a display list generation / output process of generating a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

  Here, the display list is image shaping information for molding effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Alternatively, the display list is generated for each of a plurality of frames (frame update timing). In the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

  Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each animation pattern set in the animation control processing described later, a drawing control command according to the contents of the animation scene information is set for each animation pattern already set. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the lowest priority animation group to the animation pattern of the highest priority animation group according to the priority order (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. , But vice versa.

  In step T10, the central CPU 142 performs a drawing instruction process for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output display list. By performing the drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer on the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

  In step T11, the centralized CPU 142 performs a sound list generation / output process of generating a sound list composed of a group of sound control commands and outputting the generated sound list to the audio control unit 148.

  Here, the sound list is sound output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as sound data and music data to be output from the sound output device 9, and is used when a new sound is output. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

  In step T12, the central CPU 142 performs a sound output command process for instructing the sound control unit 148 to output a sound based on the output sound list. By performing the sound output command processing, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output a sound based on the sound list.

  Therefore, the output of the various sounds is started from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and is also synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. The output from the audio output device 9 is terminated.

  The output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing, but the output of various sounds is output from the audio output device 9 so as not to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. May be stopped, and vice versa.

  In step T13, the general CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list of the next frame, and then proceeds to step T4. After that, the processing from step T4 to step T13 is repeatedly performed in a loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the general control unit 141)
The command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141. The command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

  In step T20, the central CPU 142 performs a command receiving process of receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m. Specifically, a process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144 is performed, and the current command reception interrupt process ends.

(V blank interrupt processing of the general control unit 141)
The V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141. In the V blank interrupt processing, the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 145 (VDP) ends (1/30). It is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every second (approximately 33 ms) is received (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms).

  In step T30, the central CPU 142 performs a counter update process of updating a predetermined number of various counters (scene switching counter, weight frame counter, frame counter, etc.) (for example, adding “1”). In step T31, the image control unit 145 ( VDP) to perform a frame buffer switching instruction process for giving an instruction to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147.

  Thus, each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer”. And alternately.

  In step T32, the supervisor CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since the frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes in steps T8 to T13 are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of change production at winning)
FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed) to a blue character icon when a game ball enters the first starting port 45.

  The timing T1 is the 280th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a of the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal fluctuation effect display screen a is displayed.

  The timing of T2 is a timing in the middle of the 280th frame from the start of the variable effect. At this timing, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting port 45, a starting port winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

  The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, it is determined that the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed as a blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. Does not start.

  At the timing of T3, drawing of the image data c (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generated notification sound. . The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. You.

  The timing of T6 is the 284th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. You.

  The timing of T7 is the 296th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, fluctuation effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 continues to output the second generated notification sound.

  The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is a timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Further, drawing of image data i (background image, fluctuation effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started. Is displayed, and the image display device is brought into a state in which a normal fluctuation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed.

  The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data j (background image, fluctuation effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data i drawn on the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal fluctuation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

  As described above, the output of the second notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization (in synchronization) with the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). As compared with the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is shifted, the player is less likely to feel discomfort, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to do.

  Also, while the output of the second generation notification sound has been started (in synchronization with) the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed, the deletion of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound have been started. Is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of the game, the output of the second generation notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and the interest of the game can be improved. Becomes

(Example of a change effect at the time of winning)
FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in a case where the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) with a blue character icon when a game ball enters the first starting port 45.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, the effect symbol 70a is variably displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold storage is stored. Usually a fluctuation effect is performed.

  Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting opening 45, a starting opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m, and the icon change effect determination processing is executed, and as a change scenario, It is assumed that “scenario 02” (the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed with a blue character icon at the time of winning) is determined.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), in response to the game ball winning in the first starting port 45, the first display icon 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B displays the first hold icon (blue character). Icon) H11 is displayed, and the second output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26C, stop display is performed in a combination (here, “234”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been deleted is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been displayed in a variable manner, the central variable display area is displayed. , A reach effect for varyingly displaying the effect symbol 70a is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), when the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, the reach effect ends and the variable display ends. Here, since the variable display ends, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the audio output device 9 during the fluctuation effect. The same applies to FIG. 29, FIG. 32, FIG. 33, FIG. 36, and FIG.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
FIGS. 27 and 28 are timing charts showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode updating process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the blue character icon. It is a chart.

  The timing of T1 is the 600th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period in which the stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a of the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T2 is a timing in the middle of the 600th frame from the start of the variable effect. At this timing, a fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

  The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is determined that the normal change pattern 01 for changing the first hold icon into the blue character icon is executed, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second output from the audio output device 9 is performed. Notification sound output is not started.

  At the timing of T3, drawing of the image data c (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the next variable effect (the timing at which the variable effect is started). At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generated notification sound. . The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 continues to output the second notification sound. .

  The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 continues to output the second notification sound. .

  The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, fluctuation effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 continues to output the second generated notification sound.

  The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is a timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound, which has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames), is stopped, and the image data i (background image, fluctuation effect image, various patterns, etc.) is output to the second frame buffer. The image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is displayed on the image display device, and the normal fluctuation effect display screen h (blue character) is displayed on the image display device. Icon display) is displayed.

  The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is a timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data j (background image, fluctuation effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data i drawn on the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal fluctuation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

  As described above, the output of the second notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization (in synchronization) with the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). As compared with the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is shifted, the player is less likely to feel discomfort, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to do.

  Also, while the output of the second generation notification sound has been started (in synchronization with) the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed, the deletion of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound have been started. Is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of the game, the output of the second generation notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and the interest of the game can be improved. Becomes

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect when the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon at the start of the change (at the time of the shift) (normal change pattern 01).

  As shown in FIG. 29A, when the first hold icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B. Suppose that the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the change display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2. H11 and H12 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

  Here, when the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the display mode is changed to a blue character icon and displayed. Further, the icon is changed from the CD icon to the blue character icon, and the second output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29C, stop display is performed in a combination (here, “164”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been deleted is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 29D, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Is done.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (e), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a which has been displayed in a variable manner, and the central variable display area is displayed. , A reach effect for varyingly displaying the effect symbol 70a is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (f), when the effect symbol 70a of “3” is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, the reach effect ends and the variable display ends. Here, since the variable display ends, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of character action change pattern 01)
30 and 31 are timing charts showing various timings when the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to the red character icon. It is a chart.

  The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the fluctuation effect (the timing at which the fluctuation effect is started), and is the frame update timing at the start of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a of the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal fluctuation effect display screen a is displayed.

  The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m decides to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the icon TH to a red character icon, but no character or the like is displayed on the image display device, and the sound is not displayed. The output of the third generation notification sound from the output device 9 is not started.

  At the timing of T2, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and is drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T3 is the 62nd frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal fluctuation effect display screen d (character display) is displayed. Not started.

  The timing of T4 is the 63rd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, character images, etc.) on the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn on the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen e (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the sound output device 9 does not output the third generated notification sound. Is continued.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data g (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, character images, etc.) on the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn on the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device. However, the sound output device 9 does not output the third notification sound. Is continued.

  The timing of T6 is the 91st frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the non-output of the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is continued. You.

  The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data i (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal fluctuating effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the third generation notification sound. . The timing of T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  The timing of T8 is the 106th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the third notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued, and the image data j (background image, fluctuation effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn to the first frame buffer. Is started, the display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

  The timing of T9 is the 107th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is a timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound, which has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames), is stopped, and the image data k (background image, fluctuation effect image, various patterns, etc.) to the second frame buffer is output. Drawing of images, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuation effect display screen j (red character) is displayed on the image display device. Icon display) is displayed.

  The timing of T10 is a timing that is the 108th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect and is a timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, fluctuation effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data k drawn on the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal fluctuation effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed.

  As described above, the output of the third generation notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization (in synchronization) with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). As compared with the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is shifted, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to do.

  In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound has been started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the generation of the third generation notification sound have been started. Since the output is stopped at a different frame update timing, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing at which the red character icon is deleted, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Example of the effect change pattern 01)
FIG. 32 and FIG. 33 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon during the variable effect (character effect change pattern 01).

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect symbol 70a is variably displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. A normal fluctuation effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), after the character C1 is displayed (see FIG. 32 (b)), the character C1 performs a throwing kiss operation and points the heart H toward the icon (CD icon) TH. There is a directing effect.

  Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 32D, the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. Is output for 0.5 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been displayed in a variable manner, the central variable display area is displayed. , A reach effect for varyingly displaying the effect symbol 70a is executed.

  Then, when SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 33B, an effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3, thereby suggesting a jackpot, and indicating that the fluctuatingly displayed effect symbol 70a is a jackpot ( Here, the display is stopped at "222").

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33D, the effect symbol 70a returns to the original size from the reduced display and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of symbol action change pattern 01)
FIGS. 34 and 35 show various timings when the symbol action change pattern 01 is determined as the reserved icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process, and the display mode of the first reserved icon is changed to the red character icon. It is a timing chart.

  The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the fluctuation effect (the timing at which the fluctuation effect is started), and is the frame update timing at the start of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a of the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal fluctuation effect display screen a is displayed.

  The timing of T2 is the 299th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, it is determined that the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the first hold icon to the red character icon is executed, but no change symbol or the like is displayed on the image display device, and the audio output device 9 is not displayed. Does not start outputting the third generation notification sound.

  At the timing of T2, drawing of the image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and is rendered to the first frame buffer. The display of the displayed image data c on the image display device is started, and the image display device is brought into a state in which the normal fluctuation effect display screen c is displayed.

  The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period in which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and has been drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and a temporary stop effect display screen d (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. No output is started.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and has been drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output is continued.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and has been drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output is continued.

  The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing is performed in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, and a temporary stop effect display screen g (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output is continued.

  The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and has been drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, and the temporary halt effect display screen h (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Output of sound is started. The timing of T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  The timing of T8 is the 345th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data j (background image, stop effect image, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data i on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen i (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Output is continued.

  The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound, which has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames), is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is output. Image, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and a temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed.

  The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data 1 (background image, fluctuation effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data k drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is brought into a state in which a temporary stop effect display screen k (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed.

  As described above, the output of the third generation notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization (in synchronization) with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). As compared with the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is shifted, the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to do.

  In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound has been started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the generation of the third generation notification sound have been started. Since the output is stopped at a different frame update timing, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing at which the red character icon is deleted, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Example of design effect change pattern 01)
FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect when the display mode of the hold icon is changed to a red character icon (symbol effect change pattern 01) while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (during temporary stop).

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the state in which the first holding icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 of the first holding icon display area 70B, the normal variation in which the effect symbol 70a is variably displayed. Direction is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is displayed in the left variable display area, "3" is displayed in the right variable display area, and "change" is displayed in the central variable display area (temporarily). While the stop symbol is being displayed), an effect such as lightning appears from the changed symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) in the center variable display area toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1, When a hit is made, the display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been displayed in a variable manner, the central variable display area is displayed. , A reach effect for varyingly displaying the effect symbol 70a is executed.

  Then, when SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 37B, an effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed at the upper left, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3, thereby suggesting a jackpot, and indicating that the effect symbol 70a, which has been displayed in a fluctuating manner, is a jackpot ( Here, the display is stopped at "222").

  Then, as shown in FIG. 37D, the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m executes the change effect at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command (start-up opening winning designation command or variation pattern designation command), There is a case where the effect control unit 130m executes the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command, so that the variation of the change effect is increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

  In the present embodiment, the icon change effect determines the final display mode and the scenario when the effect control unit 130m receives the starting opening winning designation command, but is not limited to such a method. . For example, at a timing when the display mode of the icon (the icon or the holding icon) can be changed, it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode each time. Further, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start-up winning award designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how the final display mode is changed depends on the timing at which the display mode of the icon (the icon or the hold icon) can be changed. May be determined each time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display modes of the icons (the icons and the hold icons) include a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon as special icons. Although the type was, it is not limited to four types, and may be more or less.

  For example, a special icon (flashing CD icon) may be provided that has a lower jackpot winning expectation than the blue character icon and suggests that it may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, since the jackpot winning expectation is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) In a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing, it is desirable that the special icon is not changed. By doing so, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command), which are likely to change to the display mode with the high jackpot winning expectation degree Change effect), it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged, to increase the variation of the icon display mode, and to enhance the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

  Further, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation degree of the icon (the icon, the holding icon) is determined in the order of (CD icon <) blinking CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon. What is necessary is just to make it high.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if the character C1 or the change symbol is displayed in the character effect change pattern 01 or the symbol effect change pattern 01, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is always changed. However, there may be provided a case where the character C1 and the changing symbol are not changed even if they are displayed (a so-called gassing effect). In the case where such a gassed effect is provided, the gassed effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command). The execution rate is higher than the change effect at the time of winning, and the gaseous effect for the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command), or the normal change pattern 02, the character action change. It is desirable to be able to execute only the fake effect for the pattern 01 and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed a plurality of times during one fluctuation effect, but may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command) have only one timing during the change effect, so that the normal change pattern The pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be executed a plurality of times. By doing so, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the reserved icon) may be changed a plurality of times in one fluctuation effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01) generated at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command is determined by the predetermined command (start opening winning designation). Command or a variation pattern designation command), the frame update timing is two frames after the number of frames received. However, the frame update timing is not limited to two frames. It may be after the frame.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not provided as the icon change pattern, but may be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the “normal change pattern 01” is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the change pattern designation command. However, the present invention is not limited to this timing. The change effect may be executed at a frame update timing according to the reception of the symbol storage designation command or the effect symbol designation command.

  In the present embodiment, when the “normal change pattern 02”, the “character effect change pattern 01”, and the “symbol effect change pattern 01” are executed, at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command. Although the change effect is executed, the change effect is not limited to this timing, and the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the icon, the hold icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect to notify that the icon (the icon, the hold icon) has changed. However, the present invention is not limited to such an effect. In addition to the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the changed icon (the icon, the reserved The lamp may emit light in the same color as the display mode of the icon). In this case, similarly to the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the frame update timing at which the changed icon (the icon or the reserved icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed. At the same time (synchronously), the light emission of the lamps of the panel lighting device 74 and / or the frame lighting device 10 may be started, and the timing of terminating the light emission of the lamps may end after a predetermined time has elapsed. Alternatively, the processing may be ended (in synchronization) with the frame update timing for deleting the icon (the icon or the reserved icon).

  In the present embodiment, the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Is also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted by the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted by the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a winning change effect and a normal change pattern 01 (a change effect that occurs at a frame update timing in response to receiving a predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may not be executable. By doing in this way, the first specific game state and the second specific game state are set to have a short fluctuation time, so that the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the By limiting the execution of the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command), the playability of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game without spoiling.

  In the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the hold icon or the icon itself. However, the present invention is not limited to such a change, and the display of the hold icon or the icon itself may be performed. Without changing the mode (as the CD icon), a reserve icon or an effect of a color indicating the jackpot winning expectation may be displayed around the icon, or the periphery of the reserve icon or the icon (near) A character indicating the jackpot winning expectation may be displayed, or a character icon (for example, “SP” or “pseudo-ren”) indicating a scheduled effect to be executed around (near) the holding icon or the icon. May be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the change scenario is determined, the determination is made irrespective of the jackpot hit, but may be determined with reference to the jackpot hit. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of change scenarios, based on the icon final display mode, the current number of suspensions, the hit of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). .

As described above, when the change scenario is determined with reference to the jackpot hit, when the jackpot is won and the character changes to a red character icon, the current hold number is set to “1” or “2” rather than “1” or “2”. In the case of "3" or "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that a change scenario that changes to a red character icon when winning is easily selected.
In other words, if the jackpot has been won and it changes to a red character icon, the current redemption number is "1" or "2" rather than "3" or "4" when a red character is won at the time of winning. It can also be said that the selection rate (%) is such that a change scenario that changes to an icon is difficult to select.
In addition, if the player does not win the jackpot, that is, if the player loses and changes to the red character icon, the change scenario changes to the red character icon at the time of winning, rather than to the case of winning the jackpot and changes to the red character icon. May be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when determining the hold icon change pattern, the determination is made irrespective of the current number of hold and the hit of the jackpot, but the determination is made with reference to the current number of hold and the hit of the jackpot. You may. Specifically, one of the plurality of holding icon change patterns is selected from the plurality of holding icon change patterns based on the mode of the change of the hold icon in the present fluctuation effect, the current number of holds, the hit of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). What is necessary is just to determine a change pattern.

As described above, when the hold icon change pattern is determined with reference to the current number of holds and the jackpot hit, when the jackpot is won and the icon changes to a red character icon, the current hold number is set to “1” or “ The selection rate (%) in the case of “3” or “4” may be set to be easier to select “normal change pattern 01” as the hold icon change pattern than in the case of “2”.
In other words, when the jackpot is won and the character changes to a red character icon, the hold icon change pattern is more when the current hold number is “1” or “2” than when the current hold number is “3” or “4”. It can be said that the “normal change pattern 01” is hardly selected.
In addition, when the jackpot has not been won, that is, when the player has lost the game and changes to the red character icon, the "normal change pattern 01" May be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

  As described above, when the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command) change to the red character icon, the current number of suspensions is “1”. In the case of "3" or "4", the jackpot winning expectation degree is higher than in the case of "2" or "2", so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(2nd Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Here, the description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

  In the second embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 39A, a special symbol TZ variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol is displayed at the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70. It differs from the first embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying is provided.

  Further, at the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70, a first reserved number display area 70E for displaying a first reserved numeral indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1), The second embodiment is also different from the first embodiment in that a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the 2 special symbol reserved numbers (U2) is provided.

  Note that the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F correspond to the first reserved information, and the first reserved icon display area The first hold icon displayed on the 70B and the second hold icon displayed on the second hold icon display area 70D correspond to the second hold information, and the icon displayed on the icon display area 70C is the execution information. Is equivalent to

(Specific example when the variable production starts from the customer waiting state)
With reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, a specific example at the time when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described. FIG. 38 is a timing chart at which the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state. FIGS. 39 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 40 (g) to (k) show (a) to (k) in FIG. It is a figure showing the production example corresponding to.

  First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame from the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, the subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39A, the first image display device 70 is in a state where the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the hold icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

  The timing of T1 is a timing at which the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (the fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first reserved number and the non-animated increase display of the first reserved icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is performed. Is started.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved numeral displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “0” to “1”. At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 in the normal size. In addition, the audio output device 9 outputs a first generated notification sound (picot).

  The timing of T2 is a timing at which the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is reduced from "1" to "0" and a variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) is started by the normal variable pattern (start of a customer waiting state). From the fifth frame). At this timing, a variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, a decrease display of the first reserved number by non-animation, and a change display (decrease display) of the first reserved icon to the icon by the animation are started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “1” to “0”. At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the reduced design in which the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) is started, and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

  The timing of T3 is a timing that is the tenth frame from the start of the output of the first generation notification sound (the fourteenth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the effect is produced. The reduced display of the symbol 70a continues.

  The timing of T4 is the timing when the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon starts is the 20th frame (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the change display of the first hold icon ends.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and At the same time as the icon TH, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

  The timing of T5 is a timing that is the 40th frame from the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the central variable display is performed. Scroll (downward movement) of effect symbol 70a in the area is started.

  The timing of T6 is a timing that is the 50th frame from the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect design 70a in the central variable display area, the right variable display is performed. The scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the region is started, and the effect symbol 70a is scrolling in all the variable display regions.

  The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame from the start of the variable effect (the 230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “3” is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the variable display area on the left side, and The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the center and right variable display areas.

  The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame from the start of the variable effect (the 260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “5” is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the variable display area on the right side, and The scrolling of the effect design 70a continues in the central variable display area.

  The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame from the start of the variable effect (the 290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “6” is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the central variable display area, and a loss occurs. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating the presence is displayed.

  The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame from the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left-center-right variation display region is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is effected. Stop display is performed in the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  As described above, when the number of reserved special symbols increases (changes from “0” to “1”) during the waiting state for the customer, the number of reserved symbols and the icon of the reserved icon by non-animation are minimized for one frame. Since the game ends in a period (time), it is possible to immediately shift to the variable effect (reduced display of the reserved numbers and changed display of the reserved icon) so as not to be delayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the generation notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold digits and the hold icon is continued until the (frame update) timing after the end of the increase display of the hold numbers and the hold icon (frame update). Since the game is continued, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, when the number of reserved special symbols decreases (changes from “1” to “0”), a reduced display of the reserved numbers by non-animation and a change display of the reserved icons by animation to the icons are executed. Therefore, the player can be made to surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the special symbol hold is performed because the timing of completing the display of the reduced holding numbers (frame update) is earlier than the timing of completing the change display of the hold icon to the icon (frame update). While producing a change in the number, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has been reduced by the reserved numbers, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, the effect design does not scroll (not updated to the next effect design), and the effect design is displayed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (update to the next production symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable production starts after the hold memory decreases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game Become.

  When the number of special symbol reservations increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the increase display of the hold icon is not executed in a non-animation manner, but rather than the increase display of the hold figures. It may be executed by animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, instead of starting the reduced display of the reserved digits and the change display of the reserved icon to the icon (reduced display) at the same (frame update) timing, the display of the reduced reserved digits is completed (frame update). If it is earlier, either may be started first. By doing so, the decrease in the number of reserved special symbols can be grasped at an early stage while the degree of freedom of display control is improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Also, at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) is not started (start is delayed than usual), but the change display of the hold icon is changed. Scrolling of the effect design (update to the next effect design) may be started at a timing (frame update) slightly before completion.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during a floating production)
With reference to FIGS. 41 to 42, a specific example when the number of holdings increases during the fluctuation effect will be described. FIG. 41 is a timing chart in which the number of suspensions increases during a variable effect, and FIGS. 42 (a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (c) of FIG.

  First, the timing of T1 is a timing that is the 50th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect by the normal fluctuation pattern. At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

  The timing of T2 is a timing at which the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (the 60th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increased display of the first reserved number by non-animation and the increased display of the first reserved icon by animation are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “0” to “1”. At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 in a very small size, and the enlarged display is started. In addition, the audio output device 9 outputs a first generated notification sound (picot).

  The timing of T3 is the 10th frame from the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (the 70th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends with the end of the increase display of the first hold icon.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 ends and the first image is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed.

  As described above, when the number of special symbol reservations increases, an increase display by non-animation of the reserved numbers and an increase display by animation of the reservation icon are executed, so that the player is notified that the number of special symbol reservations has increased. Can be surely recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the number of special symbols to be reserved changes because the timing for completing the display of the reserved digits (frame update) is earlier than the timing for completing the display of the reserved icons (frame update). While producing this, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of special symbols reserved has increased due to the reserved figures, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the special symbol reservation number increases during execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the reservation icon is performed over a longer period of time than when the special symbol reservation number increases during the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the generation notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon ends in synchronization with the timing when the increase display of the hold icon ends (frame update), the special symbol hold number is reduced. The increase can be effectively produced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increased display of the reserved icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the change display of the reserved icon to the icon, the variable effect is started. It can be emphasized, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, instead of starting the increase display of the reserved digits and the increase display of the reserve icon at the same (frame update) timing, if the timing at which the increase display of the reserved digits is completed (frame update) is earlier, May be started first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special symbols at an early stage while improving the degree of freedom of display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, instead of shortening the period relating to the increased display of the reserved icons, rather than shortening the period relating to the change display of the reserved icons to the icons, the period relating to the increased display of the reserved icons may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, instead of shortening the period relating to the increase display of the suspension icons, rather than shortening the period relating to the change display of the suspension icon to the icon, both periods may be set to the same length.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases immediately after decrease)
With reference to FIGS. 43 to 44, a specific example in which the number of reservations increases immediately after the reduction will be described. FIG. 43 is a timing chart in which the number of suspensions increases immediately after the decrease, and FIGS. 44 (a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG.

  First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the fifth frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the first image display device 70 is in a state in which the effect symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. ing. Also, “2” is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and “0” is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and a first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. It is in a state.

  The timing of T1 is a timing at which a variation effect (variable display of a special symbol) according to the normal variation pattern is started (20th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are changed, the first reserved number is reduced by non-animation, the first reserved icon is changed by animation to the icon, and the first reserved icon is reduced by animation. Display starts.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “2” to “1”. . Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the second display unit 70B2 is displayed. The 1 hold icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display unit 70B1. Further, the reduced design in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) is started, and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

  The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display by the non-animation of the first hold number is started. Since the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon are being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon and the notification at the time of the icon occurrence are performed. The output of the generated notification sound, which is a sound, is on standby.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “1” to “2”. At the same time, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame from the start of the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon end. In addition, the increased display of the waiting first standby icon by animation is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44D, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and At the same time as the icon TH, the first hold icon H12 moved from the second display unit 70B2 is located at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2 in a very small size, the enlarged display is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound (picot) from the audio output device 9 is started. You.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon and the output of the first generation notification sound continue.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44E, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display unit 70B2, and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (picot) from the audio output device 9 continues. In addition, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display area on the left side is started.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the tenth frame from the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends with the end of the increase display of the first hold icon.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 ends and the first image is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

  As described above, when the number of special symbol reservations increases during execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed (frame update). Even before the timing, the display of the increase of the reserved number is started, so that the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during the execution of the change display and the decrease display of the reserve icon. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When the number of special symbols held increases during execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the display of the increase of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited (restricted). When the change display and the decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the display of the increase of the hold icon and the output of the notification sound are started, so that it becomes difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbol holds. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. Is also good.

  Further, at the timing when the change display and the decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the notification sound are not started (the start is delayed than usual), but the change of the hold icon is changed. The display of the increase of the hold icon and the output of the notification sound may be started at a timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the display and the decrease display. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the transition of the number of reserved special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, even when the number of special symbols held increases while the hold icon is being increased, the display of the increase of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited (restricted) as in the case of the change display or the decrease display of the hold icon. On the other hand, the increase display of the hold number may be started, and the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound may be started at the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during specific reach production)
With reference to FIGS. 45 to 46, a specific example when the number of holdings increases during the specific reach effect will be described. FIG. 45 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect, and FIGS. 46 (a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) of FIG. .

  First, the timing of T1 is a timing at which the 400th frame has elapsed since the start of the variation effect using the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variation display of the special symbol TZ are continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, respectively, and the effect symbol is displayed in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. In addition, “1” is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and “0” is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

  The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a development effect for developing into an SP reach effect is started.

  Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “7” temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display regions and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the central variable display region are shifted to the upper left of the screen. Starts moving and reduced display.

  The timing of T3 is a timing that is the fifteenth frame from the start of the development effect (the 445th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect is continuing.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), in the first image display device 70, the effect design 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right fluctuation display areas and the scroll in the center fluctuation display area are performed. The effect symbol 70a is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen, and is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

  The timing of T4 is a timing that is the 30th frame from the start of the development effect (the 460th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect ends, and the SP reach effect starts.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect design 70a of the variable display area in the middle left and right is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and in the center of the screen. A confrontation effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. In addition, leaving the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C, a hold icon (here, a hold icon) displayed in a hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D). Only the first holding icon) is hidden together with the holding icon display area. Further, the special symbol TZ is in the reach state with the same "7" symbol as the effect symbol 70a.

  The timing of T5 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (820th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, an increase display of the first hold number by non-animation is started. However, since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon at this timing and the time when the icon is generated are displayed. The generated notification sound, which is the notification sound, is not output.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “1” to “2”. At the same time, the final effect of the confrontation effect (determined effect for informing whether or not a jackpot is performed) is being executed.

  The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame from the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (fixed effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (e), in the first image display device 70, the effect that the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3 is performed, and the effect symbol 70a that is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen. Is temporarily stopped (becomes rocked) in a combination ("777") indicating that the jackpot is a big hit.

  The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame from the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 910th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the return display and the increase display of the first hold icon by non-animation are performed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect design 70a, which has been reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (in a state of swinging). become). Also, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed again on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display unit 70B2.

  Finally, the effect symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped in the left-center-right variation display area, is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination "777" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  As described above, when the number of special symbols to be held increases during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), even if the number of the reserved figures is earlier than the timing at which the specific effect ends (frame update). Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the number of special symbols held increases during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is on standby (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display). At the timing when the loss effect design or the jackpot effect design is enlarged display) (frame update), the increase display of the reserve icon is started, so that it is possible to prevent the transition of the number of special design reserves from becoming difficult to grasp and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to do.

  In addition, when the increase display of the reserve icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) is completed, the increase of the reserve icon by non-animation that is completed in one frame is performed, so that the number of special symbol reservations is increased. Even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing and the timing of executing the increased display of the hold icon, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling of the player and improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) is completed, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol reservations increases at the timing when the specific effect ends by the occurrence notification sound. It is difficult to misunderstand that it has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, even if the number of special symbol reservations increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the display of the increase of the reserved number is performed while the execution of the increase display of the reserved icon is waited (restricted). In addition, it is preferable that the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase at the timing when the specific effect is completed (frame update) is executed collectively in one frame.

  In addition, when the special symbol reservation number increases during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), instead of outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the reserved digits. Is also good.

  In addition, the SP reach effect has been exemplified as the specific effect, but the SPSP reach effect may be included in the specific effect, or the full-rotation reach effect may be included.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
With reference to FIGS. 47 to 49, a specific example in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described. FIG. 47 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. FIGS. 48 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 49 (g) to (i) show (a) to (i) of FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect corresponding to i).

  First, the timing of T1 is a timing when the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state is started and the 400th frame is reached. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48A, “1” is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and “4” is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second reserved icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed on the first display part 70D1 to the fourth display part 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, respectively. And the icon TH is displayed. Further, at the top of the screen, the number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, “0 remaining”) is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, the game ball is directed toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU prompting to fire is displayed.

  The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 415th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold numeral by non-animation is started, but since the first hold icon display area 70B has been deleted, it is an increase display of the first hold icon and a notification sound at the time of the icon occurrence. The output of the generated notification sound is not performed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “1” to “2”. At the same time, the scroll of the effect symbol 70a continues.

  The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a which has been variably displayed in the variably displayed area in the middle left is temporarily stopped at the same time.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “285” is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the left-to-right middle variable display area, The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating the loss is displayed.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a (the 445th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display indicating the result of the game during the predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG darkens, and the “special time end” indicating the end of the specific game state and during the predetermined advantageous period The number of executed big hit games "big hit x1" is displayed. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame from the start of the result display (the 460th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (e), in the first image display device 70, the character “TOTAL 1200pt” indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during the predetermined advantageous period is displayed. It is displayed additionally.

  The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame from the start of the result display (the 475th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. It is stopped and displayed in the same combination "285" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable production) at which the last (100th) variable production in the specific game state ends and the first variable production in the normal game state starts. At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduced display of the second reserved number by non-animation, the change display of the second reserved icon by animation to the icon, the reduced display of the second reserved icon by animation, The non-animation return display of the first hold icon and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon are started.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from “4” to “3”. At the same time, the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4. The second hold icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 displayed on the screen start moving (shifting) toward the next adjacent display unit.

  Further, the first hold icon display area is restored and the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 in a return manner, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced design in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) is started, and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. On the upper left of the screen, a left-hit image HU for urging the player to shoot game balls toward the left area of the game area 5a is displayed.

  The timing of T8 is the timing when the 20th frame has elapsed since the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon (the 510th frame from the start of the previous fluctuation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon end.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 moved from the first display unit 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and At the same time as the icon TH, the second holding icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display unit, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a stops.

  The timing of T9 is a timing that is the tenth frame after the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are completed (the 520th frame from the start of the previous fluctuation effect). At this timing, the scroll of the effect symbol 70a (moving downward) continues.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display region on the left, the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display region is scrolled. Scrolling (moving downward) is started.

  As described above, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold icon is started while the increase display of the first hold icon is started. Therefore, even when the specific effect is being executed, the player can be made aware that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the first hold icon is increased and displayed at the timing when the specific game state (the last variable effect in) is completed (frame update). In order to start the game, it is possible to recognize that the number of the first special symbol reservations has increased even if the display of the increase in the number of the first reservation numbers executed earlier is missed, and to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when the increase display of the first hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) is completed, a special symbol hold is performed to perform the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame. Even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing when the number is increased and the timing when the increased display of the hold icon is executed, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity of the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) is completed, the generation notification sound is not output, so the special symbol is generated at the timing when the specific game state ends by the generation notification sound. It is difficult to misunderstand that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, the effect design does not scroll (not updated to the next effect design), and the effect design is displayed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Is started (update to the next effect symbol), it is easy to grasp the progress of the effect during the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, even when the number of the first special symbol reservations increases by a plurality of times during the specific game state, while the display of the increase of the reserved numbers is executed, the execution of the display of the increase of the reserved icon is on standby (restricted). The increase display of the reserve icon corresponding to the increase at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) is completed (frame update) may be collectively executed in one frame.

  In addition, when the number of the first special symbol reservations increases during the specific game state, the generation notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the reserved digits instead of outputting the generation notification sound.

  In the present embodiment, the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second reserved icon display area 70D is set (displayed). Instead, only the first hold icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

  In the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is being performed during the fluctuation effect. However, the icon may not be displayed without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect, or may not be set (displayed) during the execution of the specific effect. May be hidden.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F are set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but are set on the second image display device 71 ( Display), or may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, or the like) different from the image display device. When the LED is set to a dedicated LED, the number of special symbols to be reserved may be displayed according to the lighting color of the LED or the lighting / flashing mode.

(Third embodiment)
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 50-1 to 56-2. Here, the description of the same parts as in the second embodiment will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

[Description of transition from first display mode to second display mode]
First, with reference to FIGS. 50-1 to 50-3, a description will be given of a change in the display mode of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ displayed on the first image display device 70 in the third embodiment. FIG. 50A is a diagram for explaining a change in the display mode when displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode. FIG. 50B is a diagram illustrating a change in the display mode when the SP reach effect is executed. FIG. 50C is a diagram illustrating a change in the display mode when the first display mode is displayed in a non-reach mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 50-1 to 50-3, the display mode of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ in the third embodiment is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode. In the first display mode, at least two of the effect symbol columns out of the effect symbols 70a formed of the three effect symbol columns are stopped, and one unstopped effect symbol column is variably displayed. This is a display mode in which at least two symbol columns out of the special symbol TZ constituted by one symbol column are stopped, and one unstopped symbol column is variably displayed. Therefore, in the first display mode, in the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol is not visually recognizable in at least one of the three effect symbol columns, that is, the display is not recognizable. Further, in the special symbol TZ, the symbol row is not recognizable in at least one of the three symbol rows. On the other hand, the second display mode means that all of the three effect symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are stopped, and all of the three symbol columns of the special symbol TZ are also stopped, so that all the effect symbol columns and the symbol columns are visible. That is, it is a recognizable display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 50-1 (a), when the first display mode is displayed in the normal reach mode, for example, the two effect symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed at the same effect symbol such as “7”. One effect symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, and two symbol rows of the special symbol TZ are also stopped and displayed in a symbol "7" corresponding to the effect symbol "7" in which one symbol row is displayed in a variable manner. doing. Next, as one mode of the second display mode after being displayed in the normal reach mode, as shown in FIG. 50-1 (b), for example, in the effect pattern 70a, the display is changed and displayed in the first display mode. The one effect symbol row that was displayed is displayed in a reach-losing suggestion mode in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a different effect pattern from the effect symbol of the effect symbol row that was stopped and displayed in the first display mode, such as “3”. There is also a symbol TZ which is stopped and displayed in a reach loss suggestion mode including a symbol corresponding to the effect symbol 70a which is stopped and displayed. In addition, as another mode of the second display mode after being displayed in the normal reach mode, as shown in FIG. 50-1 (c), for example, in the effect symbol 70a, the display is changed and displayed in the first display mode. One of the effect design columns is displayed in the same way as the effect symbol of the effect symbol sequence stopped and displayed in the first display mode, such as “7”, in a jackpot suggestion mode stopped and displayed with the special symbol TZ. In some cases, stop display is performed in a jackpot suggestion mode including a symbol corresponding to the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 50-2 (a), in the first display mode when the SP reach effect is executed, for example, two effect symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed at the same effect symbol such as “7”. One effect symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, and two symbol rows of the special symbol TZ are also stopped and displayed in a symbol "7" corresponding to the effect symbol "7" in which one symbol row is displayed in a variable manner. doing. Next, as shown in FIG. 50-2 (b), a battle effect as an SP reach effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen. . Then, as shown in FIG. 50-2 (c), when the ally character C2 is defeated in the battle effect, as one mode of the second display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 50-2 (d), On the other hand, in the effect symbol 70a, there is a display that returns to the original size and is stopped and displayed in a reach-losing suggestion mode, and a special symbol TZ is also stopped and displayed in a reach-losing suggestion mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 50-2 (e), when the ally character C2 wins in the battle effect, as another mode of the second display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 50-2 (f) In some cases, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the jackpot suggestion mode after returning to the original size, and the special symbol TZ is also stopped and displayed in the jackpot suggestion mode. In addition, in FIG. 50-2 (c) and FIG. 50-2 (e), although three effect symbol columns in the effect symbol 70a are stopped and all effect symbols can be recognized, at least one of the special symbols TZ can be recognized. This is a display mode in which three symbol columns are variably displayed. In the present embodiment, the display time in FIG. 50C is 2 seconds, and the display time in FIG. 50E is 3 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 50-3 (a), when the first display mode is displayed in the non-reach mode, the two effect symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are different from each other, such as "7" and "1". Stop display at the effect symbols, one effect symbol column is displayed in a variable manner, and the two symbol columns of the special symbol TZ are also stopped and displayed at the symbols corresponding to the effect symbols "7" and "1". One symbol row is variably displayed. Then, as one mode of the second display mode after being displayed in the non-reach mode in the first display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 50-3 (b), the variable display is performed in the first display mode. For example, the one effect symbol row that was displayed is displayed in a non-reach-losing suggestion mode in which it is stopped and displayed with a different effect symbol from the two effect symbols in the effect symbol row that has been stopped and displayed in the first display mode, such as “2”. At the same time, some special symbols TZ are stopped and displayed in a non-reach loss suggestion mode.

[Explanation of end-of-change suggestion effect]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51-1 and FIG. 51-2, a change end suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 51-1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change end suggestion effect, and FIG. 51-2 is a diagram illustrating another example of a change end suggestion effect. The change end suggestion effect is an effect that is executed at a predetermined timing between the first display mode and the second display mode. This is an effect that, when executed immediately before, indicates the end of the change. In this effect of suggesting the end of change, in the effect symbol 70a, all effect symbols can be recognized because three effect symbol columns are stopped and displayed, but in the special symbol TZ, at least one symbol column is displayed in a variable manner. I have. In addition, the change end suggestion effect is not necessarily performed between the first display mode and the second display mode, and may be changed to the second display mode without being performed after the first display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 51-1, as one specific example of the fluctuation end suggestion effect, for example, a predetermined behavior such that each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a which is stopped and displayed vibrates is performed. There are aspects. The variable display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1 (a) is a case where the first display mode is displayed in the normal reach mode or the case where the SP reach effect is executed, and the second display mode is different from the reach loss suggestion mode. 50-1 (a) → FIG. 51-1 (a) → FIG. 50-1 (b), and FIG. 50-2 (c) → It can be executed when a transition is made as shown in FIG. 51-1 (a) → FIG. 50-2 (d). Further, the variable display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1 (b) is a case where the first display mode is displayed in the normal reach mode or the case where the SP reach effect is executed, and the second display mode indicates the jackpot suggestion. This is executed when the mode is established. For example, the transition is performed as shown in FIG. 50-1 (a) → FIG. 51-1 (b) → FIG. ) → FIG. 51-1 (b) → FIG. 50-2 (f). Furthermore, the variable display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1 (c) is executed when it is displayed when the first display mode is a non-reach mode and the second display mode is a non-reach loss suggestion mode. For example, it can be executed when a transition is made as shown in FIG. 50-3 (a) → FIG. 51-1 (c) → FIG. 50-3 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 51-2, as another specific example of the effect of suggesting a change end, for example, a change end in which each of the effect symbols shines as a background image HG near the periphery of the effect symbol 70 a being stopped and displayed. There is a mode in which a suggestion display is displayed. The variable display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-2 (a) is a case where the display is performed in the normal reach mode or the SP reach effect is executed in the first display mode, and is the same as the reach loss suggestion mode in the second display mode. 50-1 (a) → FIG. 51-2 (a) → FIG. 50-1 (b), and FIG. 50-2 (c) → It can be executed when a transition is made as shown in FIG. 51-2 (a) → FIG. 50-2 (d). In addition, the variable display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-2 (b) is a case where the first display mode is displayed in the normal reach mode or the case where the SP reach effect is executed, and the second display mode indicates the jackpot. This is executed when the mode is established. For example, the transition is performed as shown in FIG. 50-1 (a) → FIG. 51-2 (b) → FIG. ) → FIG. 51-2 (b) → FIG. 50-2 (f). 51-2 (c) is executed when the first display mode is the non-reach mode and the second display mode is the non-reach loss mode. For example, the processing may be executed when a transition is made as shown in FIG. 50-3 (a) → FIG. 51-2 (c) → FIG. 50-3 (b).

  In the present embodiment, for example, the display time in FIGS. 50-1 (b) and 50-2 (d) is longer than the display time in FIGS. 50-1 (c) and 50-2 (f). It is assumed that the display time is short and the display time in FIG. That is, the time during which the second display mode is displayed is set to be longer in the order of the jackpot suggestion mode, the reach loss suggestion mode, and the non-reach loss suggestion mode. Further, for example, the display time in FIGS. 51-1 (b) and 51-2 (b) is 3 seconds, and the display time in FIGS. 51-1 (a) and 51-2 (a) is 1.5. And the display time in FIGS. 51-1 (c) and 51-2 (c) is 0.5 seconds. That is, the execution time of the fluctuation end suggestion effect is set to be longer in the descending order of the possibility of the big hit.

[Explanation of pseudo continuous production]
Next, the pseudo continuous production will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52-1 is a diagram for explaining an example of pseudo continuous production when displayed in a normal reach mode in the first display mode. FIG. 52-2 is displayed in a non-reach mode in the first display mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the pseudo consecutive production in the case of having performed. Here, the pseudo continuous effect is an effect that is executed at a predetermined timing between the first display mode and the second display mode. In particular, when a change end suggestion effect is executed, the first display mode is performed. This is an effect executed between the mode and the change end effect. For example, in the first display mode, after being displayed in the normal reach or non-reach mode, it is executed as a pseudo continuous production by suggesting that the pseudo continuous production is to be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 52-1 (a), in the pseudo continuous production when displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode, first, one effect pattern 70a of the normal design mode 70a in the first display mode. A pseudo-sequence display such as "chance" is displayed in the area where the columns are displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 52-1 (b), all the symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are again variably displayed. Next, after the fluctuation display again, as shown in FIG. 52-1 (c), the two symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed again with the same symbol such as “7”, and one symbol column is displayed in a variable display. Is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 52-1 (d), although three effect symbol columns in the effect symbol 70a are stopped and all effect symbols can be recognized, at least one symbol column of the special symbol TZ fluctuates. The display mode is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 52-2 (a), in the pseudo continuous production when displayed in the non-reach mode in the first display mode, first, one of the effect symbols 70a in the non-reach mode in the first display mode. A pseudo-sequence display such as "chance" is displayed in the area where the symbol row was displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 52-2 (b), all the symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are again variably displayed. Then, after the fluctuation display again, as shown in FIG. 52-2 (c), the two symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed at the same symbol such as “7”, and one symbol column is displayed in a variable manner. . Then, as shown in FIG. 52-2 (d), although three effect symbol columns in the effect symbol 70a are stopped and all effect symbols can be recognized, at least one symbol column of the special symbol TZ fluctuates. The display mode is displayed.

  In the above-described pseudo continuous production, the case where the first display mode is simply displayed in the normal reach or non-reach mode has been described. The effect design may be combined with the effect in which the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed by eyes. For example, after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the chance, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed. Further, the SP reach effect may be executed after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the chance. In addition, in the pseudo continuous production described above, the display time in FIG. 52-1 (d) is assumed to be 2 seconds. Further, in the case of the reach loss suggestion mode in the second display mode, a display in which the special symbol TZ is variably displayed but can be recognized in the reach symbol mode in the effect symbol 70a may be performed. It may be one second.

  Further, in the pseudo continuous production described above, FIG. 52-1 (d) and FIG. 52-2 (d) are displayed from the display of the temporary stop state of FIG. 52-1 (a) and FIG. 52-2 (a). In this embodiment, the pseudo continuous production is performed once, but the pseudo continuous production may be performed two to three times. Specifically, in FIG. 52-1 or FIG. 52-2, the mode is (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... Or (a) → (b) → (a) A pseudo continuous effect such as in the form of... May be executed a plurality of times, or a combination of FIG. 52-1 and FIG. 52-2 may be used. Further, the expectation degree for the jackpot at the time of executing the pseudo continuous production including the mode of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. ) → (b) → (a) →... May be set to be higher than the degree of expectation for the jackpot when executing the pseudo continuous production. In the above-described pseudo continuous production, the display time in FIG. 52-1 (a) is 2 seconds, whereas the display time in FIG. 52-2 (a) is 1 second. The display time of FIG. 52-1 (d) may be longer than the display time of the temporary stop of FIG. 52-1 (a), or the display time of FIG. 52-2 (d) may be longer than that of FIG. ) May be longer than the display time of the temporary stop.

[Description of resurrection performance]
Next, the resurrection effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of the resurrection effect when the SP reach effect is executed. Here, the resurrection effect is an effect that is executed at a predetermined timing between the first display mode and the second display mode. In particular, when a change end suggestion effect is executed, the first display mode is performed. This is an effect executed between the mode and the change end effect. For example, in the battle production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 in the SP reach production after the first display mode described with reference to FIG. 50-2 confront each other, the ally character C2 is defeated, and the battle production ends once. After that, the battle effect is executed again. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), a display indicating that the ally character C2 has been defeated in the battle effect, and a display mode indicating that the battle effect is to be ended is displayed. At this time, the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and all the special symbols TZ are displayed in a variably manner. It will be in the state that was done. Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), a resurrection suggestion display such as "Resurrection" is displayed in the area where the effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the friend character C2 and the enemy character C3 are again formed in such a manner that the friend character C2 is larger than before the defeat and the enemy character C3 is smaller than before the victory. The effect of the confrontation is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (d), a character such as "victory" is displayed in the area where the effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (e), the display suggests that the ally character C2 wins in the battle effect and ends the battle effect, and three effect symbol columns in the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed. Although all effect symbols are recognizable, at least one symbol row of the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variably displayed manner. In the above resurrection effect, the display time in FIG. 53 (e) is assumed to be one second.

  In the above-described resurrection effect, characters such as "victory" are displayed before displaying the display condition suggesting that the battle effect indicating the victory of the ally character C2 is ended. It does not have to be. For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (f), the special symbol TZ may be displayed in a variable manner, but a darkening effect may be executed such that the entire background image HG darkens black. In other words, a resurrection effect in a form as shown in FIG. 53 (c) → FIG. 53 (f) → FIG. 53 (e) may be executed. In the resurrection effect described above, the mode in which the user wins in the battle effect after the resurrection and changes to the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode has been described. The embodiment may be changed to a reach loss suggestion embodiment. In such a resurrection effect when the player loses, for example, a mode in which the transition is made as shown in FIG. 53 (c) → FIG. 53 (f) → FIG. 50-2 (c) may be adopted.

  The above-described battle effect, resurrection effect, and pseudo-sequence effect can be said to be effects that improve the degree of expectation of becoming a jackpot suggestion mode before the second display mode. In addition, since the effect is executed in such a manner that the degree of expectation is gradually increased with the elapse of the execution time of the effect, it can be said that the effect is an effect in which the degree of expectation is gradually improved. Further, in the effect, the recognizable state of the effect symbol may be executed a plurality of times while the special symbol TZ changes.

[Description of Other Embodiments]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54-1 to FIG. 54-7, another example of the effect of suggesting a change end will be described. Each of FIGS. 54-1 to 54-6 is another example of the change end suggestion effect, and is a diagram illustrating an example. FIG. 54-7 illustrates an example of the change end suggestion effect in the effect symbol 5470a. FIG.

  The fluctuation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-1 is a mode in which each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed moves in a predetermined manner such that the position changes. . More specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-1 (a), although the effect symbol “7” that has been stopped and displayed moves upward, one of the effect symbols 70a of the effect symbol 70a that is displayed in a variable manner is displayed. The position is displayed so as not to change. Next, as shown in FIG. 54-1 (b), the effect symbol sequence that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, with the moved effect symbol maintaining its position as it is. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-1 (c), the position of the effect symbol that has been moved upward changes, returns to the position where the original effect symbol 70a was displayed, and all effect symbols 70a stop. Is displayed.

  In the effect of suggesting a change end shown in FIG. 54-2, a change end suggestion display in a form like a shutter door is displayed as a background image HG near the periphery of the effect symbol 70a in which one effect symbol row is variably displayed. It is an aspect of a certain aspect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-2 (a), in a state where the effect symbol 70a in which one effect symbol row is variably displayed is recognizable, the shutter doors opened on both sides of the effect symbol 70a are displayed. Such a change end indication is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 54-2 (b), the change end indication changes so that the shutter door closes, and all the effect symbols 70a become invisible. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-2 (c), the change end indication is changed so that the closed shutter door is opened, and all the effect symbols 70a can be recognized.

  The fluctuation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-3 (a) is a mode in which each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed performs a predetermined behavior such that it vibrates. The mode of vibration shown in FIG. 54-3 (a) is different from the mode shown in FIG. 51-1. More specifically, the effect of the effect symbol 70a illustrated in FIG. 51-1 is a mode in which the effect symbol vibrates little by little in the vertical and horizontal directions, whereas the effect of the effect symbol 70a illustrated in FIG. Is a mode that vibrates largely in the left and right directions. Next, the fluctuation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-3 (b) is a mode in which each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a being stopped and displayed performs a predetermined behavior such that it shines. The shiny aspect shown in FIG. 54-3 (b) is different from the aspect shown in FIG. 51-2. More specifically, in the effect design 70a illustrated in FIG. 51-2, the background image HG has a mode in which the vicinity of each of the effect designs glitters, whereas the effect is illustrated in FIG. 54-3 (a). The shining aspect of the effect symbol 70a is an aspect in which each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed shines. The change end suggestion effects shown in FIG. 54-3 are executed in, for example, a change pattern that is a jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, and are a non-reach loss suggestion mode and a reach loss suggestion mode in the second display mode. In the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1 or FIG. 51-2 may be executed. In other words, in the variation pattern that is the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, the variation end suggestion effect is in a mode similar to the change end suggestion effect in the non-reach loss suggestion mode and the reach loss suggestion mode such as vibration and shine, but is unique. It can be of an embodiment.

  The fluctuation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-4 is a mode in which each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed performs a predetermined behavior such that the effect symbol itself is greatly enlarged. More specifically, the effect symbol of the effect symbol 70a of the normal size shown in FIG. 54-4 (a) is enlarged as compared with the effect symbol of the normal size shown in FIG. 54-4 (b). In this embodiment, each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a is enlarged and changed so that the effect symbol becomes larger. The change end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-4 may be executed, for example, in a change pattern that becomes a jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode. In other words, in the variation pattern that becomes the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, the change end suggestion effect of the specific mode that is not executed as the change end suggestion effect in the non-reach loss suggestion mode and the reach loss suggestion mode may be executed. it can.

  The variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-5 is a mode in which each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed performs a predetermined behavior such that it is reduced in size. More specifically, at least one of the effect symbol columns fluctuates in the effect symbol 70a larger than the normal illustrated in FIG. 54-5 (a), and is different from the normal illustrated in FIG. 54-5 (b). All of the effect design rows are stopped and displayed in the large effect design 70a, and the effect design is reduced so that the effect design becomes smaller than the effect design of the normal size shown in FIG. 54-5 (c). This is a mode in which each of the effect symbols 70a is reduced and changed. The change end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-5 may be executed, for example, in a change pattern that is a non-reach loss suggestion mode or a reach loss suggestion mode in the second display mode. In other words, in the variation pattern that is the non-reach loss suggestion mode or the reach loss suggestion mode in the second display mode, the change end suggestion effect of the specific mode that is not executed as the change end suggestion effect in the jackpot suggestion mode may be executed. it can.

  The fluctuation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-6 is a mode in which a predetermined behavior such that the effect symbol itself of the effect symbol 70a being stopped and displayed is rotated is executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-6 (a), each of the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a rotates at the same speed in the same direction, or as shown in FIG. 54-6 (b). This is a mode in which the three effect symbols of the symbol 70a rotate integrally. The change end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-6 may be executed, for example, in a change pattern that becomes a jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode. In other words, in the variation pattern that becomes the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, the change end suggestion effect of the specific mode that is not executed as the change end suggestion effect in the non-reach loss suggestion mode and the reach loss suggestion mode may be executed. it can.

  The effect of suggesting the end of change shown in FIG. 54-7 is an effect composed of a number portion 5470b having a number as a main component and a character portion 5470c imitating a predetermined character different for each number of the number portion 5470b. This is the mode executed by the symbol 5470a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-7 (a), a mode in which only the character portion 5470c vibrates or performs a predetermined operation, or a mode in which only the character portion 5470c shines It is. Various effects may be executed not only in character portion 5470c but also in number portion 5470b. For example, the numeral portion 5470b may vibrate in a manner different from that of the character portion 5470c shown in FIG. 54-7 (a). Further, in FIG. 54-7, the case where the second display mode is a reach loss suggestion mode is illustrated. However, FIG. 54-7 shows a variation pattern that is a non-reach loss suggestion mode or a jackpot suggestion mode. Such a variation end suggestion effect may be executed.

  It should be noted that the above-described change end suggestion effects may be executed not only individually but also in a mode in which a plurality of change end suggestion effects are combined. For example, a mode may be employed in which the effect symbol performs a predetermined behavior and a fluctuation end indication by the background image HG is displayed near the periphery. Specifically, in the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed as illustrated in FIG. 51-1, a predetermined behavior such that each of the effect symbols themselves vibrates, and each of the effect symbols as the background image HG near the periphery. It may be of a mode in which glittering display is combined. Also, in FIGS. 50-1 to 54-6, the effect is described with the effect design 70a having a number as a main component, but various effects using the effect design 5470a are executed instead of the effect design 70a. It is also possible to execute various effects such as changing to the effect symbol 5470a instead of the effect symbol 70a at a predetermined timing.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display of the special symbol TZ during the transition from the first display mode to the second display mode is a mode in which at least one symbol row is displayed in a variable manner. It may be displayed. For example, in the special symbol TZ in the first display mode in FIGS. 50-1 to 50-3, all symbol columns may be variably displayed. In addition, the special symbol TZ in the effect display of the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 52-1 and 52-2 is such that all the symbol columns are displayed during the execution of a series of effect displays or during the execution of some effect displays. It may be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the special symbol TZ in the effect display of the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 53, all the symbol columns may be variably displayed during the execution of a series of effect displays or during the execution of some effect displays.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the change of the display mode when the SP reach effect is executed has been described. However, the same display mode is also applied when the SPSP reach effect in a mode different from the SP reach effect is executed. The transition may be performed. In the above-described embodiment, the effect of indicating the end of change in a mode in which the effect symbol itself performs a predetermined behavior is executed immediately before the second display mode. However, the effect symbol is displayed after the second display mode. May be performed. For example, after the second display mode of the reach loss suggestion mode or the non-reach loss suggestion mode, the effect symbol performs an effect of a mode that performs a predetermined behavior different from the fluctuation end suggestion effect, and all effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a. An effect in which the columns are displayed in a variable manner may be executed.

[Explanation of low / high accuracy fluctuation patterns]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55A and 55B, a description will be given of the selectivity of a variation pattern obtained by combining the various effects described above as the additional effects. FIG. 55-1 is a diagram exemplifying a low-probability fluctuation pattern table which is a fluctuation pattern table in the low-probability game state, and FIG. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 55A and 55B, each of the low-probability variation pattern table and the high-probability variation pattern table has 15 variation patterns from variation pattern 1A to variation pattern 5C. These fluctuation patterns 1A to 5C will be described. In the low-probability fluctuation pattern table and the high-probability fluctuation pattern table, there is a fluctuation pattern represented by “fluctuation pattern” + “number” + “alphabet”, but the “fluctuation pattern” + “number” is the same. , The first display mode and the second display mode have the same variation pattern. For example, the first variation of the variation pattern 2A and the variation pattern 2B are the same in the normal reach mode, and the second display mode is the same in the reach loss suggestion mode. Further, the additional effect refers to an effect of any one of the resurrection effect, the pseudo continuous effect, and the change end effect, and an effect of a combination of these effects.

  The variation pattern 1 is a variation pattern when the first display mode is displayed in a non-reach mode, and the second display mode is a non-reach loss suggestion mode. Of these, the variation pattern 1A is a pattern in which no additional effect is executed, and is selected with a probability of 85% in the low-probability game state and 87% in the high-probability game state. The fluctuation pattern 1B is a pattern for executing only the fluctuation end suggestion effect as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 5% in the low-probability game state and 3% in the high-probability game state. The variation pattern 1C is a pattern in which only the pseudo continuous production is executed as an additional production, and is selected with a probability of 10% in the low-probability game state and 10% in the high-probability game state.

  The variation pattern 2 is a variation pattern when the first display mode is displayed in a normal reach mode and the second display mode is a reach loss suggestion mode. Of these, the variation pattern 2A is a pattern in which only a variation end suggestion effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 70% in the low-probability game state and 65% in the high-probability game state. The fluctuation pattern 2B is a pattern for executing a pseudo continuous production and a fluctuation end suggestion production as additional productions, and is selected with a probability of 5% in the low-probability game state and 5% in the high-probability game state. The variation pattern 2C is a pattern in which only the pseudo continuous production is executed as an additional production, and is selected with a probability of 25% in the low-probability game state and 30% in the high-probability game state.

  The variation pattern 3 is a variation pattern when the SP reach effect is executed as the first display mode and the reach loss suggestion mode is used as the second display mode. Of these, the variation pattern 3A is a pattern for executing only a variation end suggestion effect as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 60% in the low-probability game state and 60% in the high-probability game state. The fluctuation pattern 3B is a pattern for executing a resurrection effect and a fluctuation end suggestion effect as additional effects, and is selected with a probability of 10% in a low-probability game state and 5% in a high-probability game state. The variation pattern 3C is a pattern in which only the resurrection effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 30% in the low-probability game state and 35% in the high-probability game state.

  The variation pattern 4 is a variation pattern when the first display mode is displayed in a normal reach mode and the second display mode is a jackpot suggestion mode. Of these, the variation pattern 4A is a pattern that executes only a variation end suggestion effect as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 15% in the low-probability game state and 15% in the high-probability game state. The fluctuation pattern 4B is a pattern for executing a pseudo continuous production and a fluctuation end suggestion production as additional effects, and is selected with a probability of 65% in the low-probability game state and 60% in the high-probability game state. The variation pattern 4C is a pattern in which only a pseudo continuous production is performed as an additional production, and is selected with a probability of 20% in the low-probability game state and 25% in the high-probability game state.

  The variation pattern 5 is a variation pattern in which the SP reach effect is executed as the first display mode and the jackpot suggestion mode is used as the second display mode. Of these, the variation pattern 5A is a pattern that executes only a variation end suggestion effect as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 20% in the low-probability game state and 15% in the high-probability game state. The fluctuation pattern 5B is a pattern for executing a resurrection effect and a fluctuation end suggestion effect as additional effects, and is selected with a probability of 65% in the low-probability game state and 65% in the high-probability game state. The variation pattern 5C is a pattern in which only the resurrection effect is executed as an additional effect, and is selected with a probability of 15% in the low-probability game state and 20% in the high-probability game state.

  In the low-probability game state or the high-probability game state, a variation end suggestion effect in a different mode is executed for each of the variation patterns 1 to 5. For example, in the low-probability gaming state, the variation pattern 1 has the mode shown in FIG. 51-1, the variation pattern 2 has the mode shown in FIG. 51-2, and the variation pattern 3 has the mode shown in FIG. 54-3 (a), the variation pattern 4 has the configuration as shown in FIG. 54-3 (b), and the variation pattern 5 has the configuration as shown in FIG. 54-4. This is an embodiment. In addition, in each of the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state, it is assumed that a change end suggestion effect in a different mode is executed although the fluctuation pattern is the same. For example, as described above in the low-probability game state, in the high-probability game state, the variation pattern 1 has the mode shown in FIG. 51-2, and the variation pattern 2 has the mode shown in FIG. 51-1. In the variation pattern 3, the variation pattern is the aspect shown in FIG. 54-3 (b), and in the variation pattern 4, the variation pattern is the aspect shown in FIG. 54-3 (a). In FIG. 5, the mode is as shown in FIG. 54-6.

[Explanation of fluctuation pattern according to the number of suspensions]
Next, referring to FIGS. 56-1 and 56-2, a variation pattern obtained by combining the above-described various effects, that is, additional effects, is selected according to the number of the first special reservation number and the second special reservation number. The rate will be described. FIG. 56-1 is a diagram exemplifying a small hold variation pattern table that is a variation pattern table when the number of holds is small (for example, when the number of holds is 1 to 2), and FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the multiple holding | maintenance fluctuation | variation pattern table which is a fluctuation | variation pattern table when there are many (for example, when the number of hold | maintenance is 3-4). As shown in FIG. 56-1 and FIG. 56-2, in each of the low hold fluctuation pattern table and the high hold fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is the same as the above-described low-probability fluctuation pattern table and high-probability fluctuation pattern table. , And 15 fluctuation patterns from fluctuation pattern 1A to fluctuation pattern 5C.

  As shown in FIG. 56-1 and FIG. 56-2, the small holding variation pattern table having a relatively large number of holdings is executed as an additional effect as compared with the multiple holding variation pattern table having a relatively small number of holdings. The selectivity of the variation pattern with few effects is high. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the number of holds is large, a fluctuation pattern that shortens the execution time of the variable effect for the hold is easily selected in order to promote the digestion of the hold. In order to prevent all the holds from being exhausted and interrupting the execution of the variable production and interrupting the interest of the player, it is set so that a variation pattern that makes the execution time of the variable production for the hold longer is easily selected. Will be. In addition, regarding the time during which all the effect symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed and the effect symbol can be recognized, the effect of indicating the end of the change is executed in the multiple-hold change pattern table as compared with the small-hold change pattern table. The selectivity of the fluctuation pattern is increased. In other words, although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the time during which all the effect symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are stopped and displayed and the effect symbol can be recognized is set to be longer as the number of holdings increases. Will be.

[Explanation of fluctuating effects in power outage restoration processing]
Here, this is a power failure recovery process when recovering from a power failure in the gaming machine 1, and in E250 of FIG. 11, as described above, the power recovery notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140, and Although the power restoration screen is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, and the power restoration sound is output from the audio output device 9, the power restoration screen is further displayed after the power restoration screen is displayed. The variation effect may be set to a predetermined mode. Specifically, for example, in a variation pattern that is a non-reach loss display mode or a reach loss display mode in the second display mode, when the effect pattern sequence and the special symbol TZ are restored from a power cut during a change, the first image display device is used. After the power restoration screen is displayed on the display 70, the display is always stopped and displayed in an effect symbol such as "515" which is a specific variation pattern, and the time for executing the additional effect is also specified as a specific additional effect (for example, FIG. (Only the change end suggestion effect shown in 51-2) may be executed. Further, when the effect symbol sequence and the special symbol TZ are restored from the power interruption during the change, the specific mode of the change display and the stop display of the effect symbol is either in the case of the low accuracy or the high accuracy. May be applied, or may be applied without depending on the number of reservations.

[Features of Third Embodiment]
According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect symbols of all effect symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are different from each other, and the variation patterns 1A to 1C stopped and displayed in the non-reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode, In the second display mode, the variation patterns 2A to 3C in which at least two of the effect symbols in the effect symbol sequence of the effect symbol 70a are at least two effect symbols in common and are stop-displayed in the reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. Although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the recognizable times of all effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a can be different. Specifically, the recognizable time of all effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C is a combination of the display time of FIG. 52-2 (d) and the execution time of the fluctuation end suggestion effect in the pseudo continuous effect. , 0 to 1 second. On the other hand, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C is the display time of FIG. 50-2 (c) in the battle effect or the resurrection effect, and the display time of FIG. And the execution time of the effect of suggesting the end of the change, which is 1.5 to 5.5 seconds. In addition, as described above, in the variation patterns 1A to 1C and the variation patterns 2A to 3C, all of the effects of the effect symbol 70a of the effect symbol 70a are displayed while the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner by changing the mode of the effect of suggesting the change end. It is also possible to make the style of the effect in the effect symbol during the time in which the symbol can be recognized different. According to this embodiment, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a is different between the case of non-reach and the case of reach in the first display mode, and the effect of the effect during the time is different. Since the modes are different, it is possible to prevent the player from impairing the sense of expectation of the jackpot until the second display mode indicating the result of the jackpot is suggested, thereby improving the interest.

  According to the present embodiment, the variation patterns 2A to 2C that are the normal reach as the first display mode in a state where at least one rendering symbol row of the rendering symbol 70a is in the variable display and the rendering symbol is not visible, and the rendering symbol 70a In the variation patterns 3A to 3C in which the SP reach effect is executed as the first display mode in a state where at least one effect symbol row is displayed in a variable manner and the effect symbol is not visible, the special symbol TZ is in the variable display. The time at which all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a can be recognized can be different. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 2A to 2C is a combination of the display time of FIG. 52-2 (d) and the execution time of the fluctuation end suggestion effect in the pseudo continuous effect. , 1.5-2.5 seconds. On the other hand, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 3A to 3C is a combination of the display time in FIG. 50-2 (c) and the execution time of the fluctuation end suggestion effect in the battle effect or the resurrection effect, 3 to 5.5 seconds. In addition, as described above, in the variation patterns 2A to 2C and the variation patterns 3A to 3C, the effect of the variation end suggestion effect is made different, and all the effects of the effect symbol 70a, even though the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner. It is also possible to make the style of the effect in the effect symbol during the time in which the symbol can be recognized different. According to the present embodiment, in the first display mode, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a is different between the case of the normal reach and the case of performing the SP reach effect, and during the time. Since the styles of the effects are different, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation of the jackpot until the second display mode indicating the result of the jackpot is reached, thereby improving the interest.

  According to the present embodiment, the variation pattern 2B, 2C, or the variation effect in which at least one of the battle effect, the resurrection effect, and the simulated consecutive effect, which are effects in which the special symbol TZ improves the expectation stepwise during the fluctuation display, is executed. In 3A to 3C, 4B, 4C, 5A to 5C, and in the variation patterns 2A and 4A in which none of the SP reach effect, the resurrection effect, and the pseudo-consecutive effect are performed while the special symbol TZ is changed, the special symbol TZ changes. The recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a which is being displayed can be different. More specifically, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the variation patterns 2B, 2C, 3A to 3C, 4B, 4C, 5A to 5C is determined in FIG. 52-1 (d) or FIG. The display time of (d), the display time of FIGS. 50-2 (c) and (e) in the battle effect, the display time of FIG. 53 (e) in the resurrection effect, and the execution time of the change end suggestion effect are combined. 3.5 to 7 seconds. On the other hand, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 2A and 4A is based on whether or not the execution time of the fluctuation end suggestion effect is included, and is 1.5 to 3 seconds. Also, as described above, the variation patterns 2B, 2C, 3A to 3C, 4B, 4C, 5A to 5C and the variation patterns 2A, 4A differ from each other in the aspect of the variation end suggestion effect, as described above. Although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the effect patterns in the effect symbols during the time in which all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a can be recognized may be different. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the SP reach effect, the resurrection effect, and the simulated continuous effect while the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner depends on the recognizable time of all effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a. Since it is different and the manner of production during the time is different, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation of the jackpot until the second display mode indicating the result of the jackpot is reached, Can be improved.

  According to the present embodiment, at least one of the resurrection effect and the pseudo continuous effect in which the recognizable aspect of the effect symbol is executed a plurality of times while the special symbol TZ fluctuates while the special symbol TZ fluctuates and is displayed. As shown in FIG. 55-1 and FIG. 55-2, the performed fluctuation pattern is different from the fluctuation pattern in which at least one of the resurrection effect and the pseudo continuous effect is not executed during the special symbol TZ during the fluctuation display. Although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the effect symbol 70a can be recognized for a long time in which all the effect symbols can be recognized, and the probability of the second display mode being the jackpot suggestion mode can be increased. Specifically, at least one of the resurrection effect and the pseudo continuous effect and the change end suggestion effect are executed, and the recognizable time of all the effect symbols in the fluctuation pattern is as shown in FIG. 52-1 (d) in the pseudo continuous effect. 53e in the resurrection effect or the display time of the resurrection effect, the execution time of the resurrection effect and the pseudo continuous effects are not executed. This is longer than the fluctuation pattern by the execution time of the fluctuation end suggestion effect. In the present embodiment, whether or not to execute at least one of the resurrection effect and the pseudo continuous effect and the change end suggestion effect while the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner is determined by determining whether all of the effect symbols 70a are effected. Since the recognizable time is different and the probability of a jackpot is different, the expectation of the player for the jackpot when at least one of the resurrection effect and the pseudo-sequence effect and the change end suggestion effect are executed is impaired. Can be prevented and the interest can be improved.

  According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect symbols of all effect symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are different from each other, and the variation patterns 1A to 1C are stopped and displayed in a non-reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. In the second display mode, at least two of the effect symbols in the effect symbol sequence of the effect symbol 70a are at least two effect symbols, and the variation patterns 2A to 3C are stopped and displayed in a reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. As shown in FIGS. 55A and 55B, while the special symbol TZ is being displayed while being fluctuated, the effect symbol 70a has a longer recognizable time for all effect symbols, and the second display mode Increase the probability of performing at least one of battle effects, resurrection effects, and pseudo-sequence effects that improve the expectation before Rukoto can. Specifically, the recognizable time of all effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C is a combination of the display time of FIG. 52-2 (d) and the execution time of the fluctuation end suggestion effect in the pseudo continuous effect. , 0 to 1 second. On the other hand, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C is the display time of FIG. 50-2 (c) in the battle effect or the resurrection effect, and the display time of FIG. It is a combination of the execution time of the effect indicating the end of the change, and is 1.5 to 5.5 seconds. According to the present embodiment, in the first display mode, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a is different between the non-reach case and the reach case, and the battle effect, the resurrection effect, Since the probability of executing at least one of the pseudo continuous productions is different, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation of the jackpot until the second display mode indicating the result of the jackpot is suggested is impaired. , Can enhance interest.

  According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect symbols of all effect symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are different from each other, and the variation patterns 1A to 1C are stopped and displayed in a non-reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. As shown in FIGS. 55A and 55B, the variation patterns 4A to 5C, which are the jackpot suggestion modes in the second display mode, have the effect symbol 70a of the special symbol TZ in the variable display mode as shown in FIGS. In addition to having a long time during which all effect symbols can be recognized, the probability of executing at least one of a battle effect, a resurrection effect, and a pseudo-sequence effect that improves the degree of expectation before the second display mode is increased. be able to. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C is a combination of the display time of FIG. 52-1 (d) and the execution time of the fluctuation end suggestion effect in the pseudo continuous effect. , 0 to 1 second. On the other hand, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the variation patterns 4A to 5C is the display time of FIG. 50-2 (e) in the battle effect, the display time of FIG. 52-1 (d) in the pseudo continuous effect, and the resurrection effect. The combination of the display time of FIG. 53 (e) and the execution time of the fluctuation end suggestion effect is 3 to 7 seconds. According to this embodiment, in the case of non-reach loss and the case of a big hit in the second display mode, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the effect symbol 70a is different, and the battle effect, the resurrection effect, Since the probability of executing at least one of the pseudo continuous productions is different, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation of the jackpot until the second display mode indicating the result of the jackpot is suggested is impaired. , Can enhance interest.

  According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect symbols of all effect symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are different from each other, and the variation patterns 1A to 1C are stopped and displayed in a non-reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. In the second display mode, at least two of the effect symbols in the effect symbol sequence of the effect symbol 70a have at least two effect symbols in common, and the variation patterns 2A to 3C are stopped and displayed in a reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. As shown in FIGS. 55A and 55B, the probability of executing various change end suggestion effects can be increased. According to the present embodiment, the probability of executing the fluctuation end suggestion effect is different between the case of non-reach loss and the case of reach loss in the second display mode, so that a result of a jackpot is suggested. It is possible to prevent the expectation of the player from hitting the jackpot until the display mode is changed to the second display mode, thereby improving the interest.

  According to the present embodiment, as compared to the variation patterns 1A to 3C in which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the non-reach loss suggestion mode or the reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, the jackpot is displayed in the second display mode. As shown in FIG. 55A and FIG. 55B, the variation patterns 4A to 5C serving as the suggestion modes can be set to have a higher probability of executing various variation end suggestion effects. In this embodiment, the probability of executing the change end suggestion effect is different between the case of the loss suggestion mode and the case of the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode. It is possible to prevent the expectation of the player from hitting the jackpot until the suggested second display mode is achieved, thereby improving the interest.

  According to the present embodiment, in the second display mode, the effect symbols of all effect symbol columns of the effect symbol 70a are different from each other, and the variation patterns 1A to 1C are stopped and displayed in a non-reach loss suggestion mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode. Therefore, the variation patterns 4A to 5C, which are the jackpot suggestion modes in the second display mode, have a higher probability of executing various change end suggestion effects as shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2. That is, the probability that various change end suggestion effects are executed in the non-reach loss suggestion mode can be made lower than in the case of the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode. According to this embodiment, the probability of executing the fluctuation end suggestion effect is different between the case of the non-reach loss suggestion mode and the case of the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode. Can be prevented from deteriorating the player's expectation of the jackpot until the second display mode is suggested, and the interest can be improved.

  According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, a change end suggestion effect in a different mode is executed between the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state. Can be In other words, in the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state, the mode of the end-of-change suggestion effect is made different so that all the effect symbols 70a of the effect symbol 70a are recognized although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner. It is also possible to make the style of the effect in the effect symbol during the possible time different. According to this embodiment, since the mode of the change end suggestion effect is different between the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state, the player can determine whether the current gaming state is high or low. It is easy to determine whether the game is a game, and the game can be played without spoiling the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the icon change effect in the hold icon may be further combined. For example, an icon change effect may be executed when the first display mode of the normal reach effect, the battle effect, the resurrection effect, and the pseudo continuous effect is displayed. In addition, the possibility of becoming the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode may be set so as to change depending on whether or not the icon change effect is executed. For example, the icon change effect is executed. In such a case, it may be set such that the possibility of the jackpot suggestion mode is higher than that in the case of not being executed. Further, it can be said that such an icon change effect is an effect that improves the degree of expectation to be a jackpot suggestion mode before the second display mode. Since the icon change effect can be executed in a plurality of manners so as to change in a stepwise manner, it can be said that the icon change effect is an effect in which the degree of expectation is improved in a stepwise manner. When it is changed, it can be said that the effect that the recognizable state of the effect symbol is executed a plurality of times during one change of the special symbol TZ.

(Fourth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment which is an example of an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the gaming machine 1P (pachinko machine) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the following description, the one side of the game board unit 12P shown in FIG. 57 and the direction toward the inside of the island installed in the game arcade is defined as the rear direction of the gaming machine 1P. A direction toward the player on the other side of the game board unit 12P is defined as a front direction of the gaming machine 1P. Further, the right, left, upward, and downward directions on the paper of the rear view of the game board unit 12P shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the gaming machine 1P of the present embodiment includes an outer frame 10, a game board unit 12P, and an inner frame 14P. The outer frame 10 is directly attached to an island installed in the game arcade. The outer frame 10 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which the vertical direction is longer than the horizontal direction. The game board unit 12P and the inner frame 14P are rotatably supported by the outer frame 10 in the vicinity of one vertical side of the outer frame 10.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, the game board unit 12P mainly includes a base frame 221, a game board 222, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board (not shown), and a back cover 124. I have.

  The game board unit 12P is rotatably attached to the outer frame 10 by the base frame 221 being rotatably attached to the outer frame 10. The game board unit 12P is configured by assembling a game board 222, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board, a rear cover 124, and the like on a base frame 221.

  Specifically, the game board 222 is attached to the front side of the base frame 221, and the image display device 123, the lamp relay board, the back cover 124, and the like are attached to the rear side of the base frame 221.

  When the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side, an opening (not shown) is formed in the base frame 221 and the game board 222 so that a liquid crystal screen (not shown) of the image display device 123 can be seen from the front side. ing.

  The game board 222 has a game area in which a game ball flows down. The game board 222 is attached to the base frame 221 such that the game area faces the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side of the base frame 221. The image display device 123 is arranged so as to close the opening of the base frame 221. The lamp relay board is attached to the rear side of the base frame 221. The back cover 124 covers a part of the back of the image display unit including the image display device 123 and the lamp relay board.

  On the rear side of the game board unit 12P, an assembly 2P described later is assembled. The assembly 2P is assembled to the base frame 221 below a portion where the image display unit is covered by the back cover 124.

  As shown in FIG. 57, a fitting space 241 into which a glass plate is fitted is formed in the inner frame 14P. For this reason, when assembling the gaming machine 1P, the gaming area set on the gaming board of the gaming board unit 12P can be viewed from the front through the glass plate fitted into the fitting space 241. On the front side of the inner frame 14P, an operation handle 142, an illumination lamp 143, and the like are provided.

  The assembly 2P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, the assembly 2P includes a pedestal 20P, a board case 3P, and a protective cover 23. The pedestal 20P is a component used for attaching the board case 3P to the rear side of the game board unit 12P (see FIG. 59). As shown in FIG. 61, the pedestal 20P is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the left-right direction are longer than two sides along the up-down direction, and a pair of shaft portions 21P near the left and right ends on the lower side. And a plate-shaped hook 22 is provided at the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The axial direction of the shaft portion 21P coincides with the left-right direction.

  The board case 3P is provided with a pair of hook portions 49P to be engaged with each shaft portion 21P. The pair of hook portions 49P are provided on the lower side of an outer case 45P described later. The hook portion 49P is formed in a U-shape convex toward the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 62, when attaching the board case 3P to the pedestal 20P, the board case 3P is arranged such that the hook portions 49P are convex toward the rear side. Then, the hook portion 49P is brought into a state in which the hook portion 49P can be engaged with the shaft portion 21P. Therefore, the board case 3P is brought closer to the pedestal 20P, and each hook portion 49P is engaged with each shaft portion 21P.

  When the hook portion 49P is engaged with the shaft portion 21P, the board case 3P is rotated counterclockwise (in the direction of the arrow C in FIG. 62) about the shaft portion 21P when viewed from the left side. On the pedestal 20P. As shown in FIG. 60, at this time, the plate-shaped hook 22 provided on the upper side of the pedestal 20P is hooked on the recess 3a provided on the upper side of the substrate case 3P. Therefore, the board case 3P is fixed to the pedestal 20P by the engagement between the hook portion 49P and the shaft portion 21P and the engagement between the plate-shaped hook 22 and the board case 3P.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the protective cover 23 is attached to the board case 3P. The protective cover 23 covers the lower part of the board case 3P including the hook 49P. Thus, the assembly 2P is assembled and attached to the rear side of the game board unit 12P.

  The control board 501 and the board case 3P will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, a control board 501 for controlling a game is housed in a board case 3P. A ROM 502 is mounted on the control board 501. A plurality of electronic components 595 different from the ROM 502 are mounted on the control board 501. The plurality of electronic components 595 include various electronic components such as an IC, a resistor, a connector, a capacitor, and a coil. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776 are mounted on the control board 501. Note that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are illustrated in FIG. 63B, and may not be illustrated in other drawings.

  The ROM 502 stores stored contents (data) used for controlling a game. In addition, the ROM 502 stores storage contents (data) that affect the result of the game. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from the left to the right at the lower part of the control board 501. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided below the outer case 45P of the board case 3P.

  The plurality of connectors 774 and 775 among the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are connected to at least a part of a general winning opening detecting switch, a first starting opening detecting switch, a second starting opening detecting switch, and a special winning opening detecting switch for detecting that a game ball has won. Is input. In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include a general winning opening detection switch, a first starting opening detection switch, a second starting opening detection switch, and a special winning opening detection switch 1 for detecting that a game ball has won. Assume that all signals are input. The detection signal connectors 774, 775 have a different color from the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776. In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 have a fluorescent color, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773 and 776 have a color different from the fluorescent color.

  The ROM 502 includes a plate-shaped main body 580 extending vertically and horizontally and a plurality of first signal pins 582. The first signal pin 582 is a signal pin for transmitting a signal between the ROM 502 and the control board 501. The first signal pin 582 is disposed so as to be visible through the board case 3P. More specifically, the first signal pins 582 extend above and below the main body 580 of the ROM 502 and are electrically connected to the control board 501. For this reason, the first signal pin 582 is visible from the front via the board case 3P.

  The signal pins provided on each of the plurality of electronic components 595 are referred to as second signal pins 583 (see FIG. 61). The second signal pin 583 transmits a signal between each of the plurality of electronic components 595 and the control board 501. The signal is not limited to a digital signal, but also includes an analog signal. It is arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3P. Specifically, the second signal pin 583 extends upward, downward, leftward, rightward, or forward from each electronic component, and is electrically connected to the control board 501. For this reason, the second signal pin 583 is visible through the board case 3P.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the board case 3P is a box-shaped case that accommodates the control board 501 and the ROM 502 so that they are visible and difficult to contact. Further, the board case 3P includes the control board 501 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 (see FIG. 63B) mounted on the control board 501 can be visually recognized. The substrate case 3P is formed of, for example, a light-transmissive member such as transparent plastic.

  The board case 3P includes a plurality of members 511 including the control board 501 and a cutting member 6P that cuts the sealing seal 7P. The plurality of members 511 include an inner case 40P, an outer case 45P, and a cap 8P. The inner case 40P is combined with the outer case 45P to form an inner enclosing portion 581 enclosing the control board 501. The outer case 45P is provided on the rear side which is the ROM 502 side in the board case 3P. The inner case 40P is provided on the front side of the board case 3P opposite to the ROM 502 side. In FIG. 60 (c), among the electric components provided on the control board 501 included in the transparent board case 3P, only the ROM 502 is illustrated, and other electric components are not illustrated. (The same applies to FIG. 65 (a) and the like).

  As shown in FIG. 64, each of the cases 40P and 45P includes control board storage sections 41P and 46P for storing the control board 501 (see FIG. 61), and a sealing base section 5P (see FIG. 65) described later. Stop portions 51P and 56 are provided. The control board storage portions 41P and 46P are provided with plate portions 42P and 47P formed in a substantially rectangular shape and project from the peripheral edges of the plate portions 42P and 47P. It is formed in a shape having surrounding flange portions 43P and 48P.

  As shown in FIG. 61, a cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the control board 501 side is provided on the left portion of the plate portion 42P of the inner case 40P. A hole 566 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the cylindrical portion 565. A screw thread is formed inside the hole 566. In the control board 501, a hole 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565.

  Control board 501 is fixed to inner case 40P. More specifically, a hole 567 of the control board 501 is arranged behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the inner case 40P. The shaft of the screw 769 (see FIG. 63) is inserted into the hole 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 from the rear side of the control board 501 via the hole 567. The screw thread provided on the shaft of the screw 769 (see FIG. 63B) is combined with the screw thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565. Thus, the control board 501 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the control board 501 is fixed to the inner case 40P. That is, the control board 501 is screwed to the inner case 40P side.

  As shown in FIG. 64, a portion of the flange portion 43P of the control board storage portion 41P protruding from the plate portion 42P along two long sides of the plate portion 42P (hereinafter referred to as a "male portion"). Is formed with three L-shaped hooking grooves 430 each.

  On the other hand, of the flange portion 48P of the control board storage portion 46P, a portion projecting from the plate portion 47P along two long sides of the plate portion 47P (hereinafter referred to as a "female portion") has a double wall shape. And an insertion groove 480 into which the male part of the control board storage part 41P can be inserted between the walls forming the double wall. A hook 481 is formed in each insertion groove 480.

  When the inner case 40P in which the control board 501 is screwed with the screw 769 and the outer case 45P are combined, the male part of the flange 43P is inserted into the female part of the flange 48P. Then, the control board storage portions 41P and 46P are slid with each other in the direction of arrow α in FIG. 64 along the left-right direction. Then, since the hooking groove 430 provided in the male portion engages with the hooking piece 481, the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α.

  When combined in this manner, the control board storage portions 41P and 46P form a box-shaped inner packet portion 581 that is shielded from the outside. The control unit 501 (see FIG. 61) is stored in the inner packet part 581. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the like are exchanged illegally.

  The control board 501 is mounted inside the control board storage section 46P before the control board storage sections 41P and 46P are combined. At this time, an IC or the like mounted on the control board 501 is attached so as to face the plate 47P of the control board storage section 46P. Since the plate portion 47P is also made of transparent plastic, even if the control board 501 is housed in the board case 3P, electronic components such as the ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501 are illegally replaced. This is because it can be confirmed from outside via the plate portion 47P. As shown in FIG. 58, in this embodiment, when the assembly 2P including the board case 3P is attached to the game board unit 12P, the control board 501 in the board case 3P is passed through the outer case 45P from the back side of the gaming machine 1P. The mounted electronic components can be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 64, sealing portions 51P and 56 are provided at the right ends of the cases 40P and 45P. As shown in FIG. 65, a first screwing piece 91 and a second screwing piece 96 are provided on the cases 40P and 45P above the sealing portions 51P and 56.

  When the control board storage sections 41P and 46P are slid and combined, the sealing bases 5P are formed by the sealing sections 51P and 56 at the longitudinal ends of the combined sealing body 4P.

  As shown in FIG. 63, when the cap 8P is attached to the sealing body 4P over the sealing base portion 5P, the first screwing piece 91 and the second screwing are attached to the longitudinal end of the sealing body 4P. In addition to the piece 96, a third screwing piece 98 of the cap 8P overlaps to form a screwing portion 9P for screwing.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the sealing portions 51P and 56 project rightward from the right ends of the control board storage portions 41P and 46P. The sealing portions 51P and 56 have the same height in the left-right direction and the same width in the up-down direction.

  Elongated grooves 512 and 562 are formed in the sealing portions 51P and 56 along the left-right direction. Two grooves 562 parallel to each other in the left-right direction are formed in the sealing portion 56 at predetermined intervals, and one groove 512 is formed in the sealing portion 51P along the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 65, when the cases 40P and 45P are combined as described above, the sealing portions 51P and 56 form a sealing base portion 5P on the right portion of the combined control board storage portions 41P and 46P. I do.

  In the sealing base portion 5P, the sealing portions 51P and 56 are arranged in parallel at a fixed interval, and an insertion space 5ap (see FIG. 65) is formed between the surfaces where the sealing portions 51P and 56 face each other. You.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the sealing seal 7P is used as a means for sealing the substrate case 3P, and certifies that it is a genuine product issued by an organization or the like having a certification qualification.

  The sealing seal 7P is provided with an adhesive surface on one surface of an easily cut material such as paper in consideration of cutting properties, and has a plurality of cuts. Although not shown, for example, a hologram and a QR code (registered trademark) are printed on the seal 7P. In addition, on the sealing sticker 7P, a character of "prohibition of opening" is also printed.

  The cutting member 6P is formed in a shape having a base part 60P, a pair of pinches 61P, and a cutting part 64P. The base portion 60P serving as the base of the cutting member 6P is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cutting portion 64P is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 60P. The cutting portion 64P is a portion where the tip of the base portion 60P is formed in a blade shape. The knobs 61P are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the base portion 60P, and are formed in a shape that is entirely bent in a “<” shape. The left end of the knob 61P is referred to as a free end 61a.

  The cap 8P is formed to have a size capable of covering the entire sealing base 5P over the sealing base 5P, and is detachably formed on the sealing base 5P.

  The cap 8P includes a box portion 80 formed in a bowl shape that covers the sealing base portion 5P, and a third screwing piece 98 formed at one longitudinal end of the box portion 80. On the inner surface of the box 80, a projection 82 is provided at a position where the free end 61a of the knob 61P of the cutting member 6P inserted into the insertion / extraction space 5ap is hooked when the cap 8P is attached to the sealing base 5P. Is provided. A groove 86 is formed on the inner surface of the box 80.

  The cutting member 6P is inserted into the insertion / extraction space 5ap (see FIG. 65) of the sealing base 5P. After that, the sealing seal 7P is attached. Further, when the cap 8P is put on the sealing base 5P, the groove 86 fits into a part of the cutting member 6P inserted into the insertion / extraction space 5ap. In addition, the projection 82 engages with the free end 61a of the knob 61P of the cutting member 6P.

  As shown in FIG. 63, as described above, when the cap 8P is put on the sealing base portion 5P, the third screw fixing piece 98 becomes the first screw fixing piece 91 of the inner case 40P and the second screw fixing piece 91 of the outer case 45P. The screwing piece 96 overlaps with the combination to form a screwing portion 9P for screwing. When the caulking member 30P is driven into the screwing portion 9P, the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P, and the cap 8P are fixed to each other.

  When unsealing the board case 3P, the caulking member 30P is removed and the cap 8P is removed from the sealing base 5P. The same applies to the case where the seal of the board case 3P is illegally removed.

  The cutting member 6P and the cap 8P are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 8P is removed from the sealing base 5P, the cutting member 6P is also removed from the sealing base 5P at the same time. Then, the seal seal 7P is irreparably damaged by the cut portion 64P or the like.

  The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, the identification display 520 is attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P, and the cap 8P. The identification display 520 is a display including information on the gaming machine 1P. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the control board 501 is called an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the ROM 502 is called an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the outer case 45P is called an identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the inner case 40P is called an identification display 524. The identification mark 520 provided on the cap 8P is called an identification mark 525.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the control board 501 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification displays 523, 524, and 525 attached to the board case 3P are information identification units for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed in the upper right part of the front surface of the inner case 40P by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the inner case 40P (see FIG. 65). The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 8P by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the cap 8P. The display mode of the identification display 523 and the relationship with the information identification unit will be described later.

  The identifications 521 to 525 are related to each other and include at least an identification 529 indicating the same content. In the present embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string “ABCD01”, and the identification display 522 is a character string “ABCD02”. The identification display 523 is a character string of “ABCD03”, and the identification display 524 is a character string of “ABCD04”. The identification display 525 is a character string of “ABCD05”. The identification display 529 indicating the same content in the identification displays 521 to 525 is “ABCD”. The identification display 529 is a display corresponding to, for example, a manufacturer name and a model name. In the present embodiment, as an example, of “ABCD”, “AB” represents a manufacturer name, and “CD” represents a model name.

  In the identification displays 521 to 525, the manufacturer name is not displayed as "AB" included in "ABCD", but as the "AA company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. May be. Further, instead of displaying the model name as “CD” included in “ABCD”, the model name itself may be displayed as “CR” in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. 71. Further, a model may be displayed on the identification displays 521 to 525, such as the model “GH101” in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. In this case, the identification indications indicating the same contents in the identification indications 521 to 525 are the model name “CR”, the model “GH101”, and the manufacturer name “AA”.

  In the following description, the surface forming the inside of the board case 3P in the outer case 45P is referred to as the inner surface 532. In the outer case 45P, a surface forming the outside of the board case 3P is referred to as an outer surface 531. As shown in FIGS. 60 (c), 63 (c), and 65, a position display section 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. The position display unit 541 is a part that displays a position where the identification display 523 is provided. The position display section 541 is provided on a portion of the board case 3P that is different from the portion that overlaps the ROM 502. More specifically, the position display section 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided at a lower right portion of the outer case 45P. The ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display section 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display portion 541 is a concave portion that is concave toward the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 63B, a seal portion 542 formed of a material having light transmittance is attached to the position display portion 541. In the present embodiment, the seal portion 542 is assumed to be transparent as an example. A printing unit 797 is printed on the seal unit 542. In the present embodiment, as an example, the printing unit 797 is the identification display 523. Since the identification display 523 is printed on the seal portion 542, the position display portion 541 has the identification display 523 attached thereto. The seal portion 542 is arranged so as to straddle at least a part of the plurality of electronic components 595 in the board case 3P. In other words, when viewed from the rear, the seal portion 542 is arranged so as to overlap the plurality of electronic components 595 in the board case 3P. Note that FIG. 63B shows a part of the plurality of electronic components 595, and actually, other electronic components (see FIG. 61) also exist. The identification display 523 of the outer case 45P is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be viewed. In the present embodiment, the identification portion 523 attached to the outer case 45P does not impair the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502. Note that, as in the case of a seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 72) in a modified example described later, when the board case 3P is at a predetermined angle, the identification display 523 may overlap the mounting location of the ROM 502.

  In this manner, when the seal portion or the like to which the identification mark is attached by printing or the like is attached and the object is in the state where the identification mark is attached, the seal portion or the like including the identification mark is called an information identification portion. It shall be. In the present embodiment, the seal portion 542 including the identification display 523 is an information identification portion. Note that the identification display 520 is provided on the control board 501, the ROM 502, the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P, and the cap 8P, but is not provided with one each, but is provided with two or more. Sometimes. For example, the ROM 502 may be provided with two identification displays, and similarly, there may be two information identification units.

  As described above, the gaming machine 1P according to the present embodiment is formed. In the present embodiment, a board case 3P containing the control board 501 is provided. As shown in FIG. 60, FIG. 61, FIG. 63, and FIG. 65, the substrate case 3P is provided with a position display portion 541 that is a portion that displays a position where the identification display 523 is provided. Therefore, as compared with the case where the position display section 541 is not provided, the inspector can easily check the identification display 523 attached to the board case 3P. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine 1P, the manufacturer can easily grasp the position where the identification display 520 is provided, as compared with the case where the position display section 541 is not provided. Therefore, for example, when the seal portion 542 is used and the identification mark 523 is provided by the manufacturer, the possibility that the identification mark 523 is provided at different positions among the plurality of gaming machines 1P can be reduced. Therefore, as compared with the case where the position display section 541 is not provided, the inspector can easily check the identification display 523 attached to the board case 3P. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the position display section 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the board case 3P, and is a concave portion for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display portion 541 that is a concave portion is provided, the inspector can grasp the position of the position display portion 541 as compared with a case where the position display portion 541 is displayed by printing or the like on the plane of the substrate case 3P, for example. Easy to do. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the identification mark 523 attached to the board case 3P. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display portion 541 that is a concave portion. Therefore, when mass-producing the gaming machine 1P, the manufacturer can attach the identification mark 520 to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1P. Since the identification display 520 is provided at the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1P, the inspector can easily check the identification display 520. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the position display section 541 is provided in a portion different from the portion overlapping the ROM 502 in the board case 3P. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display section 541 and the ROM 502 overlap. Therefore, the inspector can check both the identification display 523 and the ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily discover that the ROM 502 has been replaced due to fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The position display section 541 is a recess formed on the outer surface 531 of the substrate case 3P for positioning the identification display 520 (523). Since the position display portion 541 that is a concave portion is provided, it is possible to prevent the peeling of the seal, for example, when the hand is touched, as compared with the case where the seal portion 542 is attached to the plane of the substrate case 3P. it can. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector must confirm whether the seal is fraudulent, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display section 541, since the seal section is protected, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the board case 3P. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, a seal portion 542 including an identification display 523, which is an information identification portion attached to the substrate case 3P, and an identification display 522, which is an information identification portion attached to the ROM 502, are identification displays indicating at least the same contents. 529. Further, the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45P is displayed so that the mounting position of the ROM 502 has an angle at which it can be visually recognized. In the present embodiment, the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502 is not hindered by the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45P. Since the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45P is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting position of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized, the inspector can identify the ROM 502 attached with the same identification display 529 and the board case 3P. It is possible to easily confirm that no wrongdoing has been performed. Further, even when the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraud, for example, the examiner can determine whether or not the identification display 529 attached to the ROM 502 and the board case 3P is the same. You can easily confirm that wrongdoing has taken place. For this reason, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, a seal portion 542 including an identification display 523, which is an information identification portion attached to the board case 3P, an identification display 522, which is an information identification portion attached to the ROM 502, and an information identification display displayed on the control board 501. The identification display 521 as a part includes at least an identification display 529 (in this embodiment, a character string of “ABCD”) indicating the same content. For this reason, the inspector can easily check that the illegal operation has not been performed by checking the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the board case 3P provided with the identification display 529 indicating the same contents. Even if at least one of the control board 501 and the ROM 502 is replaced with another control board 501 and the ROM 502 due to fraud, the identification signs 529 attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the board case 3P are the same. By judging whether or not there is, the inspector can easily confirm that the wrongdoing has been performed. For this reason, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The board case 3P includes the control board 501 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 can be visually recognized. Since the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible, it is possible to easily determine whether, for example, a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the connectors 771 to 776. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, since the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are of a fluorescent color, it is easier for the inspector to visually recognize than the case where the detection signal connectors are not of the fluorescent color. For this reason, for example, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, a plurality of detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 as compared with the case where the number of the detection signal connectors is one. For this reason, for example, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the first signal pins 582 included in the ROM 502 are arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3P. Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, it is possible to easily determine whether, for example, a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the first signal pin 582, or not. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the second signal pins 583 included in the plurality of electronic components 595 are arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3P. Since the second signal pin 583 is visible, it is possible to easily determine whether, for example, a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the second signal pin 583, or not. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  The control board 501 is fixed to the inner case 40P side with screws 769 (see FIG. 63B). For this reason, the control board 501 is less likely to be illegally replaced than when it is not screwed. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  The outer case 45P and the inner case 40P are slid and combined with each other. For this reason, even if a person who intends to cheat simply tries to separate the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P in order to separate the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P are separated. Hard to do. Therefore, it is difficult to exchange control board 501 illegally. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various changes can be made. In the following modified examples, components corresponding to the components of the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Although the position display unit 541 is a concave portion, it is not limited to this. For example, the position display part 541 may be a convex part. FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45P of the board case 1003 according to the modification of the board case 3P, taken along the line AA shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 66, the position display portion 541 of the board case 1003 is a convex portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the outer case 45P, and protrudes rearward. The position display section 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by a seal section 542.

  Further, the position display unit 541 is provided on the outer surface 531, but is not limited to this. For example, the position display section 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45P of the board case 1103 according to the modified example of the board case 3P, taken along a line AA shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 67, the position display portion 541 of the board case 1103 is a recess formed on the inner surface 532 of the board case 1103, and is recessed rearward. The position display section 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by a seal section 542. Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can check the identification display 523 from the rear side of the substrate case 1103 via the transparent outer case 45P.

  FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the outer case 45P of the board case 1203 according to the modification of the board case 3P, taken along the line AA shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 68, the position display portion 541 of the board case 1203 is a convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the board case 1203, and protrudes forward. The position display section 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by a seal section 542. Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can check the identification display 523 from behind the substrate case 1203 via the transparent outer case 45P.

  As described above, the position display section 541 is a protrusion or a recess formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the board case 3P for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display portion 541 which is a convex portion or a concave portion is provided, for example, the inspector can set the position of the identification display 520 as compared with the case where the position display portion 541 is displayed on the plane of the substrate case 3P by printing or the like. Easy to grasp. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 520 attached to the board case 3P. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display portion 541 that is a convex portion or a concave portion. Therefore, when mass-producing the gaming machine 1P, the manufacturer can attach the identification mark 520 to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1P. Since the identification display 520 is provided at the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1P, the inspector can easily check the identification display 520. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, the plurality of members 511 including the control board 501 may not include a part of the outer case 45P, the inner case 40P, and the cap 8P. Further, the plurality of members 511 may further include members different from the outer case 45P, the inner case 40P, and the cap 8P.

  In addition, although the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the plurality of members 511 are provided with the identification mark 520, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 may have an associated identification mark 520 attached thereto. For example, the identification mark 525 may not be given to the cap 8P included in the plurality of members 511. Further, the identification mark 524 may not be attached to the inner case 40P included in the plurality of members 511. Further, the identification mark 523 may not be attached to the outer case 45P included in the plurality of members 511. The examiner can easily confirm whether or not fraud has been performed by checking the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511. For example, even if the control board 501 is replaced by another control board due to fraud, whether the control board 501 is associated with at least two of the plurality of members 511 by the identification mark 520 is determined. By judging this, the inspector can easily confirm that the wrongdoing has been performed. For this reason, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45P, and the inner case 40P. In this case, the inspector confirms the identification signs 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45P, and the inner case 40P, and easily confirms whether or not fraud has occurred. Can be. For example, even when the control board 501 is replaced by another control board due to fraud, the identification signs 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45P, and the inner case 40P are related. By judging whether or not the fraudulent act has been performed, the inspector can easily confirm that the wrongdoing has been performed. For this reason, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the identification display 520 may be provided on at least the outer case 45P and the ROM 502. In this case, the inspector can confirm at least the outer case 45P and the identification display 520 attached to the ROM 502 to easily confirm whether or not an illegal act has been performed. For example, even when the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraud, the examiner can easily determine whether or not at least the outer case 45P and the identification display 520 attached to the ROM 502 are related. We can confirm that cheating was done. For this reason, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the identification indicators 520 only need to be related to each other. For example, all of the identifications 520 may be the same identification (for example, all “ABC D01”). Further, the identification displays 520 may be different displays, and the same identification display 529 may not be included. The description content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as the inspector can confirm it. Further, the identification display 520 need not be a character string. For example, the identification mark 520 may be various marks. The manner in which the identification display 520 is provided is not limited. For example, not only the identification display 521 but also all the identification displays 521 to 525 may be printed and provided on the seal portion. Further, the seal portion may not be transparent. Further, all of the identifications 523 to 525 may be stamped by a mold for manufacturing the board case 3P.

  Further, the identification mark 520 may be formed inside the material of the board case 3P. Hereinafter, the modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The board case 1303 shown in FIGS. 69 and 70 is a modification of the board case 3P. In the board case 1303, a portion where the identification display 523 is displayed is referred to as an identification display 1390. A portion outside the identification display portion 1390 is referred to as an outside portion 1391. As shown in FIG. 70, the identification display portion 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391. Therefore, thickness L1 of identification display portion 1390 is larger than thickness L2 of outer portion 1391.

  The identification display 523 is formed inside a member forming the identification display unit 1390 (in the present embodiment, the material of the outer case 45P). The identification display 523 is provided in the identification display unit 1390 by being divided into a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-back direction).

  The character 1371 of “A” in the identification display 523 is formed in the hierarchy 1381. The letter “B” 1372 is formed in the hierarchy 1382. The letter “C” 1373 is formed in the hierarchy 1383. The letter “D” 1374 is formed in the hierarchy 1384. The character 1375 of “0” is formed in the hierarchy 1382. The character 1376 of “3” is formed in the hierarchy 1383.

  Note that the method of forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display unit 1390 is not limited. For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed by 3D laser engraving. The 3D laser engraving is a technique of condensing a laser beam and forming fine cracks of, for example, 100 microns inside the material of the substrate case 3P at an interval of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm. By forming a plurality of the cracks, the identification mark 523 is formed inside the substrate case 3P.

  In the present embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside a member forming the identification display unit 1390. Therefore, for example, the identification mark 523 is less likely to be removed than when the entirety of the identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the board case 3P. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved. If the identification mark 523 is removed by fraud, the substrate case 1303 is scratched. Therefore, the inspector can easily find the wrongdoing. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the identification display 523 is provided in the identification display portion 1390 by being divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction. Therefore, the identification mark 523 is less likely to be removed than when the identification mark 523 is formed only on one layer. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In board case 1303, thickness L1 of identification display portion 1390 is larger than thickness L2 of outer portion 1391. In this case, the board case 3P needs to be cut deeper when an unauthorized person attempts to remove the identification mark 520 than when L1 is equal to or less than L2. Therefore, the substrate case 1303 is easily damaged. Therefore, the inspector can easily find the wrongdoing. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Note that the identification display 523 may not be divided in the identification display unit 1390 into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction. For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed on only one layer. The thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 may be equal to or less than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. In addition, although the identification mark 523 has been described, the identification mark 520 provided on the board case 1303 such as the identification marks 524 and 525 may be similarly formed inside the board case 1303.

  In the above embodiment, the board case 1303 is an example of the “case section” of the present invention.

  Various seals other than the seal portion 542 and the like may be attached to the board case 3P. Further, the content displayed on a printing unit (for example, printing unit 797) provided on various stickers such as the sealing unit 542 is not limited. For example, in addition to the seal portion 542, a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the substrate case 1551 according to the modification shown in FIG. In FIG. 71, members having the same configuration as in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted.

  The seal portion 1560 is affixed to the upper part of the center of the outer case 45P of the board case 1551 in the left-right direction. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the upper left portion of the outer case 45P of the board case 3P. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are formed of a material having light transmittance. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are disposed so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 61). In FIG. 71, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 61) located in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.

  The printing unit 1571 is printed on the seal unit 1560. The printing unit 1571 includes a plurality of areas 1575. The printing unit 1571 is colored, and has a white base as an example in the present embodiment. The plurality of areas 1575 include a code section 1572, an information display section 1573, and a description area 1570. The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the printing portion 1571, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the description area 1570 are located at positions not overlapping the ROM 502.

  The code part 1572 is provided at the upper left of the seal part 1560. Code section 1572 includes predetermined information. The code portion 1572 is a portion from which information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in the present embodiment) area. I have. In the present embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

  The code section 1572 is associated with information indicating a delivery destination of the control board 501, which is stored in a device (hereinafter, referred to as “other device”) different from the gaming machine 1P, for example. For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code section 1572, is read by a camera provided in the portable information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access another device via the network. As a result of accessing the other device, the information displayed on the information portable terminal includes the delivery destination of the control board 501 (for example, the name of the store to which the gaming machine 1P was delivered) and whether or not the gaming machine 1P was discarded. Information is included. Thereby, the inspector can easily confirm information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1P has been discarded.

  The information display unit 1573 includes various information. The information display unit 1573 may include, for example, the same information as the identification display 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, a character string of “EF001” is printed on the information display unit 1573 in a rectangular colored (white in the present embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, a management number of the control board 501. By using the management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1P and whether or not the gaming machine 1P has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string in the information display unit 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, and the like. The rectangular area of the information display unit 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code unit 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

  As an example, a total of six writing areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. The description area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) base. Above the description area 1570 in the upper left, “opener” is printed in black. Above the description area 1570 in the upper right, “opened date” is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the description area 1570 at the upper left. A circle 2 is printed on the left side of the description area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left of the lower left description area 1570.

  For example, when the inspector opens the board case 3P, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the left description area 1570, and writes the date when the board case 3P was opened in the right description area 1570. In addition, the inspector may write, in the description area 1570, the date on which the control board 501 has been checked for illegality or the like.

  The seal portion 1560 includes a viewing portion 1574 for looking into the electronic component 798. The viewing portion 1574 is provided between the plurality of regions 1575. The viewing portion 1574 has a light transmitting property. In the present embodiment, the peep portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of the seal portion 1560, and is transparent. In the present embodiment, a peeping portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 in three rows in the vertical direction. In addition, a viewing section 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the code section 1572 and the information display section 1573 arranged side by side and the two upper writing areas 1570. A viewing portion 1574 extending vertically is provided between the writing regions 1570 in two rows in the left-right direction.

  The seal unit 1561 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name, a model, and a manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, a model name “CR Ai”, a model name “GH101”, and a manufacturer name “AA company” are printed. In the present embodiment, a portion on which such information is printed is also referred to as a printing unit 1563. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 is a model name “CR”, a model name “GH101”, and a manufacturer name “AA company”.

  Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the ROM 502. The seal portion 1562 is attached to the left side of the identification display 522 “ABC D02” of the ROM 502. The seal unit 1562 is an information identifying unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name, a model, and a manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the seal unit 1562 prints, as predetermined information, a model name “CR”, a model name “GH101”, and a manufacturer name “AA company”. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1596 is a model name “CR”, a model name “GH101”, and a manufacturer name “AA company”. Note that the identification display 522 of the ROM 502 is also an information identification unit. That is, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two information identification units.

  Further, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least identification marks 1595 and 1596 indicating the same contents. In the present embodiment, the identification name 1595, 1596 has the same species name "CR", the model name "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA company", but it is sufficient if a part of them is the same.

  The identifications 1595 and 1596 are provided on the board case 3P and the ROM 502, but may be provided on other members. For example, the control board 501 may be displayed including the same identifications as the identifications 1595 and 1596.

  As described above, the board case 1551, the control board 501, and the like according to the present modification are formed. In the present embodiment, since the seal portions 542, 1560, 1561 are arranged so as to straddle at least a part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 61), for example, the seal portions 542, 1560, 1561 and the electronic component 595 By checking the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether the control board 501 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, since the area 1575 is provided, the inspector can write the name of the inspector and the date of opening the board case 3P in the area 1575 (more specifically, the description area 1570). it can. In addition, the inspector can also write the date or the like when the control board 501 has been checked for illegality in the area 1575. Further, since the peeping portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. This makes it easier for the inspector to check the characters and the like described in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, since the peeping portion 1574 is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component 798 via the peeping portion 1574. Therefore, as compared with the case where the peeping section 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 798 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position where the code portion 1572 does not overlap with the ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has occurred. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  The code section 1572 is linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1P. Thus, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 using the code section 1572. For this reason, the inspector can confirm the information of the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not the unauthorized installation of the control board 501 to which the delivery destination is different has been performed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. Therefore, by checking the seal portion 1562, the inspector can easily check whether the ROM 502 is replaced. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, since at least one of the model name, model, and manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name, model type, and manufacturer name. Can be. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name, the model, and the manufacturer name, and easily determine whether or not fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with ease. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  Note that the shape of the ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 63, the ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-shaped main body 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the main body 580 may extend in the front, rear, left, and right directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the control board 501. When the main body 580 extends in the front, rear, left and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal 1591 may be displayed on the upper surface or the lower surface of the main body 580.

  Further, various types of information displayed on the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed so that the mounting portion of the ROM 502 has an angle at which the mounting portion can be visually recognized. For example, FIG. 72 is a diagram in which the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 are viewed obliquely from above at the rear. In FIG. 72, members other than the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 are not shown. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps the mounting location of the ROM 502. That is, FIG. 72 is a diagram in which the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is viewed from an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 is difficult to visually recognize. However, as shown in FIG. 71, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 71 is a diagram in which the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is viewed from an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. As described above, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is displayed so that the mounting location of the ROM 502 has an angle at which the information can be visually recognized. Although the seal portion 1561 has been described as an example, various kinds of information (for example, information of the identification display 523) displayed on the other seal portions 542 and 1560 are displayed such that the mounting portion of the ROM 502 has an angle at which the mounting portion can be visually recognized. It should be done.

(Fifth embodiment)
Next, a fifth embodiment which is an example of the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 73-1 to 73-6. In the fifth embodiment described below, components having the same configuration as the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the fourth embodiment, and detailed description is omitted.

  First, an outline of the configurations of a board case 1700 and a control board 1705 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 73-1 is a rear view of the board case 1700 in which the control board 1705 according to the fifth embodiment is stored. FIG. 73-2 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the seal portion 1710, and FIG. 73-2 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the date mark portion 1720. FIG. 73-3 (a) is a schematic view for explaining the configuration of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730, and FIG. 73-3 (b) illustrates a state where the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is attached to the substrate case 1700. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 73-4 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display configuration of the information display 1750.

  As shown in FIG. 73-1, the gaming machine 1P of the fifth embodiment includes a control board 1705 and a board case 1700 that houses the control board 1705. The board case 1700 has substantially the same configuration as the board case 1551 which is a modified example of the fourth embodiment, but includes a seal portion 1710, a date mark portion 1720, an opening prohibition seal 1730, and a RAM clear operation portion 1785 to be described later. ing. The control board 1705 has substantially the same configuration as the control board 501 which is a modification of the fourth embodiment, but includes an information display 1750, an operation key unit 1780, and a RAM clear button, which will be described later.

  The seal portion 1710 is formed of a material having light transmissivity, and is affixed to the upper part of the outer case 45P of the substrate case 1700 at the center in the left-right direction. Note that each of the seal portions 1710 is disposed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) and the like. The date mark portion 1720 is formed below the outer case 45P of the board case 1700 in the left-right central part so as to be convex from the outer case 45P on the front side of the outer case 45P. The opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is attached to a seal attachment portion 1701 formed on the right end in the left-right direction of the board case 1700. Note that the seal affixing portion 1701 is a portion covered by the cap 8P. The RAM clear operation unit 1785 is formed at the lower part on the right side in the left-right direction of the outer case 45P of the board case 1700, and is configured to be able to operate the RAM clear button on the control board 1705. The operation key portion 1780 has a structure in which a specific key can be inserted and rotated. When the insertion port of the specific key is exposed from the outer case 45P of the board case 1700, the control board 1705 is mounted on the board case. It is provided so as to be operable while housed in 1700. The operation key unit 1780 is connected to a main CPU that controls a game of the gaming machine 1P so as to be able to transmit a signal indicating whether or not the operation key unit 1780 has been operated.

  The information display 1750 is provided in the upper right corner of the right and left direction of the control board 1705 and is disposed inside a board case 1700 made of a transparent resin and covering the control board 501. The information display 1750 is located at a position different from the position where the main CPU, the main ROM, and the main RAM provided on the control board 501 are provided, and is a RAM clear operation unit provided on the board case 1700. It is provided at a position where viewing is not hindered by 1785, a seal portion 1710, or the like. Neither of the plurality of electronic components provided on the control board 1705 such as the electronic component 595 are provided around and near the information display 1750. Such an information display 1750 is conspicuous despite being provided on the control board 1705 housed in the board case 1700, so that the displayed information can be easily recognized.

  Here, the information display 1750 and the out ball detection switch (not shown) will be described. The out ball detection switch detects all game balls (in this embodiment, referred to as “out ball”) fired in the game area, and transmits data of the detection result to the main control board 300 so that the connection cable can transmit the data. Connected. The information display 1750 displays various performances of the gaming machine 1P by numerical values calculated by the main CPU based on the detection result of the out ball detection switch (calculated values by a calculation formula described later). is there. Note that whether or not the performance of the gaming machine 1P is maintained can be determined based on whether or not the numerical value displayed on the information display 1750 is within a predetermined range.

  As shown in FIG. 73-2 (a), the seal part 1710 has substantially the same configuration as the seal part 1560, and includes a print part 1711, a code part 1712, an information display part 1713, a description area 1570, and a peeping part 1574. Have. The information displayed on the predetermined terminal by reading the QR code (registered trademark) of the code unit 1712 with the predetermined terminal includes a character string described in the information display unit 1713. . That is, the predetermined information including the specific information is displayed in different modes such as the QR code (registered trademark) of the code unit 1712 and the character string of the information display unit 1713. Here, the configuration of the code section 1712 and the information display section 1713 is different from the configuration of the code section 1572 and the information display section 1573 of the seal section 1560. Specifically, the character string of “EF001” is printed across the colored area of the code section 1712 and the colored area of the information display section 1713. In the case of the seal portion 1710 having such a configuration, if one of the colored region of the code portion 1712 and the colored region of the information display portion 1713 is scraped and information is illegally changed, compared with the seal portion 1560, The trace of the change can be easily clarified, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized change of the information. Further, as described above, the electronic component 798 provided at the position covered by the seal portion 1560 is visible from the peeping portion 1574. This is because at least a part or the whole of the electronic component 798 is located on the control board. Not only perpendicular to the control board, but also visible from the direction perpendicular to the control board via the peep portion 1574. It is. Specifically, an electronic component provided at a position covered by the seal portion 1560 and which is difficult to be visually recognized by the colored region 1575 from a direction perpendicular to the control board 1705 is the seal portion. That is, it can be visually recognized through the viewing unit 1574 from a direction that is not perpendicular to the 1560 but forms a predetermined angle.

  As shown in FIG. 73-2 (b), the date mark portion 1720 is a portion for displaying the date when the substrate case 1700 was manufactured, and includes a date display portion 1721 and a date display portion 1726. . The date display unit 1721 has scales of 1 to 31 formed on the outer edge of a circular shape, and has a form in which the date manufactured by an arrow extending from the center of the circle is indicated. The year / month display portion 1726 has scales of 1 to 12 formed on the outer edge of the circular shape, indicates the month manufactured by an arrow extending from the center of the circle, and is manufactured by the numbers formed at the center of the circle. The year is indicated. That is, the date mark portion 1720 shown in FIG. 73B indicates that the substrate case 1700 was manufactured on “December 1, 2014”. Note that date mark portion 1720 shown in FIG. 73B is a case where outer case 45P is viewed from the front side of gaming machine 1P, and board case 1700 is viewed from the back side of gaming machine 1P. In this case, it is shown inverted (for example, see FIG. 73-1).

  As shown in FIG. 73-3 (a), the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 includes an information display portion 1731 on which a predetermined character string is printed, a code portion 1732 on which a QR code (registered trademark) or the like is printed, and a hard to forge. A hologram display unit 1735 on which a hologram is formed. The information displayed on the predetermined terminal by reading the QR code (registered trademark) of the code section 1732 with the predetermined terminal includes a character string described in the information display section 1731. Is also good. That is, the predetermined information including the specific information may be displayed in different modes such as the QR code (registered trademark) of the code section 1732 and the character string of the information display section 1731.

  As shown in FIG. 73-3 (b), when the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 is stuck on the seal sticking portion 1701, the seal is attached across the inner case 40 P and the outer case 45 P of the board case 1700. The inner case 40P and the outer case 45P are stuck so as to cover a part of the boundary portion 1738 when they are combined. That is, since the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P are disassembled to come into contact with the control board 1705 housed in the board case 1700, the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is broken. In other words, the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is an identification display portion whose shape changes when the substrate case 1700 is disassembled, unlike an identification display portion to which various identification information such as the seal portion 1705 is attached. In addition, the information display portion 1731 and the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 have the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 affixed to the back side of the gaming machine 1P in the seal affixing portion 1701 so as to be entirely visible. Furthermore, the information display portion 1731 and the code portion 1732 of the unsealing-prohibiting seal portion 1730 are provided at positions lower by one step in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700 than the top surface of the substrate case 1700 in the thickness direction. Can be That is, the seal portion 1710 and the unopening seal portion 1730 in the board case 1700 are configured such that the distance from the virtual plane in which the control board 1705 extends in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the control board 1705 is different. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 73-4, the information display 1750 includes a control unit (not shown), four 7-segment display units 1770 a to 1770 d configured to be arranged horizontally, and a lower right of each of the 7-segment display units. It comprises four formed dot display sections 1775a to 1775d. In addition, the information display 1750 receives data from the main control board 300 so that the main control board 300 that has received the result detected by the out ball detection switch 302a outputs data measured based on the detection result. Output is connected to enable. Further, the information display 1750 is constantly lit when the power of the gaming machine 1P is ON. In the information display 1750, when viewed from the front, the two 7-segment display units 1770a and 1770b and the two dot display units 1775a and 1775b located on the left side are used as the identification display unit 1780a, and the two The 7-segment display units 1770c and 1770d and the two dot display units 1775c and 1775d are ratio display units 1780b. The circuits are connected to the four 7-segment display units 1770a to 1770d and the four dot display units 1775a to 1775d.

[Description of Display Mode on Information Display 1750]
Next, a specific display mode on the information display 1750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73-5 and 73-6. FIG. 73-5 is a table for explaining the content and display form displayed on the information display 1750 with respect to the performance display of the gaming machine 1P, and FIG. 73-6 shows the information display 1750 with respect to the setting display of the gaming machine 1P. It is a table | surface explaining the content displayed and a display form.

  As shown in FIG. 73-5, when the performance of gaming machine 1P is displayed on information display 1750, the numerical value calculated by main control board 300 is displayed on ratio display section 1780b. Specifically, a game when the gaming state is in a low-accuracy state in a predetermined section from the time of the first power-on (every time when the total number of out-balls becomes 300 and the total number of out-balls becomes 60000 after the initial power-on) The ratio between the number of balls to be paid out and the number of out-balls of the game balls in the low-accuracy state (for example, when the game is not a time-saving game in the low-accuracy state) is output. The number of balls) ÷ (the number of out-balls in the low-probability state) × 100 ”, and a value obtained by rounding off the first decimal place is output. If the output numerical value is 100 or more, “99.” is displayed on the ratio display section. In addition, even if the RAM is cleared and the power is turned on again, the setting is made so that the measurement up to now is taken over unless the RAM is abnormal.

  In the identification display section 1780a, information that can identify the type of numerical value displayed on the ratio display section 1780b is displayed. Specifically, “bL.” Is displayed when the measurement value of the current section at the present time is displayed, and “b1. "To" b3. "Are displayed. The blinking cycle in FIG. 73-5 is 0.3 seconds on and 0.3 seconds off, and the display switching timing of “bL.” To “b3.” Is repeated for 5.0 seconds in each display. Shall be.

  Here, a flow of measurement in the gaming machine 1P of the present embodiment will be described. First, when the game machine 1P is powered on for the first time to start a game, the out ball detection switch starts detection of a game ball discharged from the out ball discharge port in the low accuracy state. Here, since the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge ports are from all the out ports in the game area, the number of game balls based on the detection result of the out ball detection switch is the total number of out balls. After the total number of outgoing balls reaches 300, a payout ball measuring switch (a switch for detecting the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, not shown) for each predetermined section in a low-probability state, and The calculated value calculated by the main CPU is output on the information display 1750 based on the detection result of the out ball detection switch.

  The gaming machine 1P is such that the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, and the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed by operating the setting key 1780 and the RAM clear button of the RAM clear operation unit 1785. Specifically, if the power of the gaming machine 1P is ON and the RAM clear button is turned ON with the setting key 1780 "ON", the setting of the jackpot probability is changed according to the number of times the RAM clear button is pressed. When the user wants to change the setting, the user can set the setting by turning the setting key 1780 “OFF”. If the power of the gaming machine 1P is ON and the RAM clear button is not operated with the setting key 1780 “ON”, the current setting of the jackpot probability of the gaming machine 1P is displayed on the information display 1750 as described later. , You can check the settings. When the game machine 1P is shipped, when the recovery information is damaged, when the power is turned on / off while the setting is being changed, and the recovery error state occurs, the power is turned on and the setting key 1780 is turned “ON” in the same manner as described above. When the clear button is turned “ON”, the setting can be changed. However, if the power is ON and the RAM clear button is not operated with the setting key 1780 “ON”, the game is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 73-6, specifically, in the gaming machine 1P of the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set from a first setting (low probability: 1/300) to a sixth setting (high probability: 1/250). ) Can be set in six stages. In this setting change and setting confirmation, in the 7-segment display unit 1770d located on the right side of the information display unit 1750, “1” to “6” are changed according to the set value to be changed or the currently set value. It is lit. Further, when the setting is changed, all the 7-segment display units 1770a to 1770d and the dot display units 1775a to 1775d blink for 5 seconds from the end of the setting change. Then, after the blinking for 5 seconds, the display of the performance of the gaming machine 1P is started on the identification display unit 1780a and the ratio display unit 1780b. During the setting change and the setting confirmation, during the setting change / setting confirmation, a sound indicating the current state such as “Setting is being changed.” A message such as "Setting is being changed / Setting is being checked" is displayed on the liquid crystal display. In such a gaming machine, the selection rate of a specific effect (in FIG. 73-6, “first effect”) in the case of a jackpot, and the loss of loss, regardless of the type of setting of the jackpot probability. The selection rate of a specific effect at that time is constant.

  Here, the terms used in the table of FIG. 73-6 will be described. The “(at the time of big hit / at the time of loss) first effect selection rate” is “first effect” selected (executed) in an effect that is executed when it is determined to be “big hit” or “losing”. As described above, the “first effect selection rate” is constant regardless of the jackpot probability of each of the first to sixth settings, as described above. The “first effect appearance rate” is a probability that the “first effect” is executed in an effect that is executed based on a ball entering the first starting device or the second starting device. Is a numerical value that can be calculated by multiplying the “big hit probability” in each setting by the “first effect selection ratio.” The “first effect appearance ratio” in the case of “losing” Multiplies the “probability of loss” in each setting by the “selection rate of the first effect” "Loss probability" refers to the probability of being determined as "losing" in the determination based on the ball entering the first starting device or the second starting device in the non-probable changing game state. It is a numerical value that can be calculated by subtracting the “big hit probability” from “1.” The “total first effect appearance rate” refers to the value of the first start device or the second start device in the non-probable change game state. In the effect selected (executed) together with the judgment based on the incoming ball, it is the probability that the “first effect” is executed.This “total first effect appearance rate” is the “first effect at the time of big hit” in each setting. It is a numerical value that is the sum of the "1 effect appearance rate" and the "1st effect appearance rate in the case of a loss." The "1st effect reliability" refers to the first starter or With the judgment based on the ball entering the second starting device, the “first production” When executed, it is the probability that the executed “first effect” is the “first effect” executed with the determination of “big hit.” The “first effect reliability” is the “first effect reliability”. This is a numerical value that can be calculated by dividing the “1 effect appearance rate” by the “total 1st effect appearance rate”.

[Operation and Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
In the case of the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the inspector 1574 is provided on the seal portion 1720. By visually recognizing the control board 1705 stored in the control board 1700, it is possible to confirm whether or not the control board 1705 has been tampered with. Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine having a board case in which an object such as the peep portion 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the control board 1705 has been tampered with. It is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud. Further, in such a seal portion 1720, a predetermined character can be described in the description region 1570, which is a plurality of colored regions, so that a predetermined portion is provided in a transparent portion without a colored region that has reduced light transmittance. This is also easier for the inspector to confirm the content of the information by the character than a seal on which the character is described. Further, in such a seal portion, since the transparent peep portion 1574 is provided between the description region 1570, the code portion 1712, and the information display portion 1713, which are a plurality of colored regions, only the plurality of colored regions are arranged. The colored area is more conspicuous than provided, and the inspector can easily check the characters and the like described in the description area 1570, the code section 1712, and the information display section 1713.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the opening date described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720, and the date mark The date of manufacture displayed on the unit 1720 is different information but has a predetermined time-series relationship. Specifically, the date of opening described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 is always a newer date than the date of manufacture displayed on the date mark portion 1720. Therefore, the inspector confirms the consistency between the date of opening of the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date of manufacture of the date mark portion 1720, thereby preventing an unauthorized act such as an unauthorized exchange of a control board. It can be easily confirmed.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the unsealing prohibition seal portion 1730 as in the present embodiment, the information displayed on the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720 is provided. Is linked to the information displayed on the opening prohibition seal portion 1730. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm an improper act such as an improper exchange of the control board by confirming the consistency between the information of the seal portion 1720 and the information of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730. Further, the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is different from the virtual surface in the thickness direction of the board case 1700 by extending the control substrate 1705 in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction. The distance is different from the distance between the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720. Therefore, the inspector can compare the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 with the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720 at the same height and on the same plane. The information in the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730, the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 can be easily visually recognized, and it is possible to easily confirm an improper act such as an improper control board exchange.

  According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the present embodiment, the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 are different in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390. Since the characters 1371 of the layer 1381 and the characters 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed such that the distance from the top surface of the board case 1700 is different. Since the identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, the identification mark 523 is removed, for example, as compared with a case where the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, since the identification mark 523 is provided at a position where the distance from the top surface in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700 is different, that is, divided and provided in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification mark 523 is formed only in one layer. It is difficult to remove compared to the case. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed by fraud or the like, the substrate case 1700 will be conspicuously damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be said to be easy and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Further, the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 are separated from each other when viewed from the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the assembly 2P because the characters 1371 and 1372 have no overlapping portion in plan view and are separated from each other. Both the character 1372 and the character 1372 can be bird's eye view, and it is also possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of an illegal act on the control board 1705 or the like.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the present embodiment, the characters 1371 and 1372 are in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390. Since the layers are formed so as to be at different levels, the characters 1371 of the level 1381 and the characters 1372 of the level 1382 are placed on a predetermined surface of the control board 1705 (for example, the control board 1705 is oriented in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction). (Extended virtual plane). Since the identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, the identification mark 523 is removed, for example, as compared with a case where the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, since the identification mark 523 is provided at a position different in distance from a predetermined surface of the control board 1705, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification mark 523 is formed only in one layer. It is more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed by fraud or the like, the substrate case 1700 will be conspicuously damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be said to be easy and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Further, the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 are separated from each other when viewed from the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the assembly 2P because the characters 1371 and 1372 have no overlapping portion in plan view and are separated from each other. Both the character 1372 and the character 1372 can be bird's eye view, and it is also possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of an illegal act on the control board 1705 or the like.

  Further, in the case of the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 and the character string of the information display portion 1713 are similar. Information linked to each other and including the same specific information is displayed in different modes. Therefore, it is difficult for the code part 1712 to be fraudulent, and even if the information in the information display part 1713 has been tampered with, the inspector can check the consistency with the code part 1712 to easily determine the presence or absence of fraud. As well as deterrence of wrongdoing. Further, in the seal portion 1720, since the peeping portion 1574 is formed between the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 and the writing area 1570, the illegal operation is performed on the control board 1705 as described above. Since it is possible to easily confirm whether the information has been tampered with, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in the present embodiment, for example, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 and the like have the peep portion 1574. It is visible without any intervention. Therefore, some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, so that it is easy to confirm fraudulent activities. In addition, some of the electronic components that can be viewed without the peeping portion 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be viewed through the peeping portion 1574. Unauthorized acts on some possible electronic components can be suppressed. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy visual recognition by opening the gaming board unit 12 of the gaming machine 1P, the information display 1750 is required to exhibit the above-described effects.

[Other Embodiments of Fifth Embodiment]
Although the detailed description is omitted in the above-described embodiment, it also has seal portions 542, 1561, and 1562, identification indicators 521, 522, and 523, and connectors 771 to 776. Among these, the seal portions 542, 1561, and 1562 and the identification displays 521, 522, and 523 display predetermined information that can be identified, and thus may be so-called identification displays. In addition, the display of the identifiable predetermined information includes a seal portion 1710, a date mark portion 1720, an opening prohibition seal portion 1730, and an information display 1750 that displays a performance display and a setting display of the gaming machine. May be included. Further, although not shown, among various electronic components provided on the control board 1705, a color code displayed on a lead resistance, an identification code displayed on a network resistance, a model number displayed on an IC, a capacitor, or a transistor. The code or the like may also be an identification display because predetermined information that can be identified is displayed. Since the shape and the number of pins of the openings of the connectors 771 to 776 in the above-described embodiments are different from each other, the shape and the number of pins of the openings of the connectors 771 to 776 are identifiable information. It may be included in the display. Although not shown, a connector number is displayed on the control board 1705 near each of the connectors 771 to 776, and this connector number is also identifiable information, and may be included in the identification display. Is also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the peeping portion 1574 of the seal portion 1710, the electronic component of the control board 1705 is visible from the peeping portion 1574. However, the electronic component of the control board 1705 may be of various modes as long as it is a region that can be visually recognized even through the board case 1705, and the same effect is obtained. For example, if a plurality of colored regions are provided with a region that is difficult to view, and if the control substrate can be viewed from a region having a higher light transmittance than the color region, the region is also similar. Has the effect of In these visible areas, not only the electronic components of the control board can be viewed, but also the control board itself, the wiring pattern of the control board, the feet of the electronic components, and the like can be viewed. . In these visible areas, a transparent socket (connector) of a ROM, which will be described later, can be visually recognized, and a transparent socket (connector) not only for the ROM but also for various electronic components such as ICs, transistors, and various resistors. Are provided, those transparent sockets (connectors) can be visually recognized. When such a visible area is provided, the same effect is obtained that fraudulent acts on electronic components can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the identification mark 523 is printed on the seal portion 542, but is formed inside the member forming the board case 1700 as described with reference to FIGS. An identification display 523 may be provided. The identification display 523 may be composed of the characters 1371 to 1376 as described above, but is not limited thereto, and may have various configurations. For example, it may be constituted by a plurality of identifiable predetermined information, that is, constituted by a plurality of identification displays. That is, a plurality of identification displays may be formed in a plurality of layers. For example, a configuration as shown in FIG. 73-7 may be used. FIG. 73-7 is a view for explaining a modification of the identification display formed inside the member forming the board case. FIG. 73A is a cross-sectional view of the identification display portion 1791 of the board case 1790 according to the modification. (B) is a cross-sectional view of an identification display section 1796 of a board case 1795 according to a modification. Note that the identification marks 1794 and 1799 in FIG. 73-7 are formed by, for example, 3D laser engraving inside the identification display parts 1791 and 1796, similarly to the identification marks 523 in FIG. 69 and FIG. . Further, the identification signs 1794, 1799 and the identification sign 523 (see FIGS. 69 and 70) may be formed by molding the substrate case with a mold.

  As shown in FIG. 73-7 (a), the identifications 1794 on the board case 1790 according to the modification include five identifications “A”, “B”, “C”, “0”, and “3”. It is formed inside a member (a material of the outer case) forming the identification display portion 1791. Further, the identification display 1794 is provided in the identification display portion 1791 in three layers 1793a to 1793c in the thickness direction. In the identification display 1794, the identification display 1792b of “A” is formed in the hierarchy 1793a, the identification display 1792c of “B” is formed in the hierarchy 1793b, and the identification display 1792a of “C” and “0” are formed. 1792d and the identification display 1792e of "3" are formed so as not to overlap in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 73-1) in the hierarchy 1793c. When the identification display unit 1791 having such a configuration is viewed from the left side (the direction from left to right in the left-right direction in FIG. 73-1), each of “A”, “B”, and “C03” is different. In addition to being visually recognizable as a hierarchy, the identification display 1794 having a configuration in which “C”, “0”, and “3” do not overlap can be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 73-7 (b), the identifications 1799 on the board case 1795 according to the modified example are “A”, “B”, “C”, “0”, “3” in the same manner as the identifications 1794. . Are formed inside a member (a material of the outer case) forming the identification display portion 1796. The identification display 1794 is provided in the identification display portion 1791 so as to be divided into four layers 1793a to 1793d in the thickness direction. In the identification display 1799, the identification display 1797b of “A” is formed on the hierarchy 1798a, the identification display 1797d of “B” and the identification display 1797c of “0” are formed on the hierarchy 1798b, and “3”. 1797a is formed on the hierarchy 1798c, and the identification “1797e” of “C” is formed on the hierarchy 1798d. Then, when the identification display portion 1796 is visually recognized from the back side of the gaming machine 1P, “A”, “B”, and “C” can be visually recognized so as not to overlap in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 73-1), When the identification display unit 1796 is viewed from the left side (the direction from left to right in the left-right direction in FIG. 73-1), the identification display 1799 is configured such that “0” and “3” do not overlap at different levels. Can be visually recognized.

  According to the identifications 1794, 1799 and the identifications 523 (see FIGS. 69 and 70) having such a configuration, the distance from the top surface of the board case to the specific identification is different, or the board is stored in the board case. The distance from the control board 1705 to a specific identification display may be different. Specifically, for example, in the identification display 1794, the identification display 1792b is configured such that the distance from the top surface of the board case 1790 is smaller than the identification display 1792a, but the distance from the control board 1705 is larger. Is formed. The identification mark 1792c is formed so that the distance from the top surface of the board case 1790 is smaller than the identification mark 1792a, but larger than the identification mark 1792b. On the other hand, the identification display 1792c is formed so that the distance from the control board 1705 is larger than the identification display 1792a, but smaller than the identification display 1792b.

  Also, according to the identification signs 1794 and 1799 and the identification sign 523 (see FIGS. 69 and 70) having such a configuration, the surface constituting the thickness of the identification display portion (the side surface in the left-right direction of FIG. The distance from the surface to be formed) to the specific identification can be configured to be different. Also, according to the identification signs 1794 and 1799 and the identification signs 523 (see FIGS. 69 and 70) having such a configuration, the top surface of the board case, the control board 1705, and the surface constituting the thickness of the identification display portion. It is also possible to configure so that the distance of the specific identification display from either of them is substantially the same. As described above, in the case where the identification display is formed in a plurality of layers inside the member forming the identification display portion, similarly to the above, each identification display is difficult to be removed, and when the identification display is cut and removed. , A trace of removal remains, thereby suppressing the occurrence of fraud. In the above description, the distance from the control board 1705 to each identification display means the distance from the surface of the control board 1705 on which the wiring pattern is formed to each identification display.

  Further, according to the identification display 1799 having such a configuration, it is possible to configure so that the directions and angles at which the identification displays can be visually recognized are different. Specifically, as described above, the identification display 1797a and the identification display 1797b in the identification display 1799 are configured to be visible from different directions and angles. Therefore, with the identification display formed in this way, the identification display can be formed in a direction and an angle that are easy for the inspector to visually recognize, and it can lead to suppression of fraud. In addition, when there is a member near the identification display unit that hinders the visual recognition of the identification display (for example, a member having a thickness larger than the thickness of the identification display unit), the position is such that the visibility is not hindered by the member. Each identification can also be formed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the identification display section, a member that inhibits visual recognition of the identification display may not be provided.

  Further, in the above-described identification displays 1794 and 1799, the individual identification displays 1792a to 1792e and 1797a to 1797e are configured, but one of the plurality of identification displays is one identification display. It may be one that forms an identification display. Specifically, in the identification display 1794, two pieces of identification information 1792b and 1792c constitute predetermined information which can be identified, and three pieces of identification information 1792a, 1792d and 1792e constitute predetermined information which can be identified. It may be. In the identification display 1799, predetermined information that can be identified by the two identifications 1797a and 1797c is formed, and predetermined information that can be identified by the three identifications 1797b, 1797d, and 1797e is visible. Different identification displays may be configured according to different directions and angles. In the identification displays 1794 and 1799, as in the case of the identification display 523 described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, each of the five identification displays may constitute one identifiable predetermined information. As one example of the predetermined information that can be identified by the five identification indications, there is a combination of “manufactured”, “constructed”, “number”, “number”, and “NО.”. More specifically, for example, in the identification display portion 1791, “Production” and “Production” are displayed as identifications on the hierarchy 1793a, “No.” and “No.” are displayed as identifications on the hierarchy 1793b, and the hierarchy 1793c , "N @." And "1234" may be displayed as identification displays. In the identification display portion 1390 (see FIGS. 69 and 70), “manufactured” is displayed as the identification display at the position of the identification display 1371 of the hierarchy 1381, and “is made” as the identification display at the position of the identification display 1372 of the hierarchy 1382. Is displayed at the position of the identification number 1373 of the hierarchy 1383, "number" is displayed at the position of the identification number 1374 of the hierarchy 1384, and "number" is displayed as the identification display, and the identification display 1375 of the hierarchy 1382 is displayed. May be displayed at the position of the identification number 1376 of the hierarchy 1383, and "1234" may be displayed at the position of the identification number 1376 of the hierarchy 1383.

  Then, according to the above-mentioned identification displays 1794 and 1799 and the identification display 523 (see FIGS. 69 and 70), the identification displays are indicated as “A”, “B”, “C”, “0”, and “3”. Although the identification information is constituted by five identification indications, the invention is not limited to this, and various types of identification indications may be displayed. Specifically, in the identification display portion 1791, the “manufacturer name” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1793a, the “model name” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1793b, the “manufacturing location” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1793c, “Production date” and “material name of control board” may be displayed. As another specific example of the identification display portion 1791, “QR code (registered trademark)” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1793a, “model name” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1793b, and the identification is displayed on the hierarchy 1793c. "Maker name" may be displayed as the display. Further, in the identification display section 1791, “Production” and “Production” are displayed as identifications on the hierarchy 1793a, “No.” and “No.” are displayed as identifications on the hierarchy 1793b, and “N $” is displayed on the hierarchy 1793c as the identification. ., "1234" may be displayed.

  Further, in the identification display portion 1390 (see FIGS. 69 and 70), the “maker name” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1381, the “model name” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1382, and the hierarchy 1383 is displayed on the hierarchy 1383. The “manufacturing place” and “manufacturing date” may be displayed as the identification display, and the “material name of the control board” may be displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1384. Further, as another specific example of the identification display portion 1390, “QR code (registered trademark)” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1381, “Model name” is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1382, and the identification is displayed on the hierarchy 1383. The "manufacturer name" is displayed as the display, and the "control board material name" is displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1384. Further, in the identification display portion 1390, “Production” and “Production” are displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1381, “No.” and “No.” are displayed as the identification display on the hierarchy 1382, and “N $” is displayed on the hierarchy 1383 as the identification display. . Is displayed, and "1234" is displayed as an identification display on the hierarchy 1384, and each identification display is displayed so as not to overlap so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine 1P. Good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the identification display formed on the identification display section of the board case has been described in detail. However, predetermined identifiable information may be displayed on the control board. For example, in some control means having a control board and a board case, various identifications are displayed at different positions in the thickness direction of the board case. Specifically, “QR code (registered trademark)” is displayed as an identification display at a position closest to the top surface of the board case, and a position closer to the control board than “QR code (registered trademark)” as the identification display. In some cases, “model name” is displayed as an identification display, and “manufacturer name” is displayed at the position closest to the control board or on the control board itself.

(Sixth embodiment)
Next, a sixth embodiment which is a modification of the above-described fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 74-1 to 74-9. FIG. 74-1 is a rear view of the board case 1803 in which the control board 501 according to the sixth embodiment is stored. FIG. 74-2 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the electronic component 595 is viewed from obliquely above via the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1561. FIG. 74C is a (a) plan view and (b) a side view of the transparent socket 1801. FIGS. 74-4 are cross-sectional views (a) to (d) of the substrate cases 1805 to 1808 in positions corresponding to the line CC in FIG. FIGS. 74-5 are cross-sectional views (a) and (b) of the substrate cases 1809 and 1810 at positions corresponding to the line CC of FIG. FIG. 74-6 is an explanatory diagram showing the special position display unit 541. FIG. 74-7 is an explanatory diagram of one method of reducing the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560. FIG. 74-8 is a schematic rear view of the case portion 1813 in which the prize ball substrate 1811 is stored. FIG. 74-9 is a schematic rear view of the case portion 1823 in which the effect board 1821 is stored. In the sixth embodiment described below, components having the same configuration as in the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the fourth embodiment, and detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 74-1, the gaming machine 1P of the sixth embodiment mainly includes a control board 501, a ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501, a plurality of electronic boards 595 mounted on the control board 501, It comprises a case section 1803, a seal section 1560 and a seal section 1561 pasted on the case section 1803, a seal section 1562 pasted on the ROM 502, and an identification display section 1390 provided on the case section 1803. The components other than the case portion 1803 have already been described. The case section 1803 has substantially the same contents as the case section 1551 except that the position display section 541 is provided on the seal section 1560.

  Note that, as described above, the information identification section refers to a seal section with an identification display, but a seal section without an identification display does not appear in the description of the sixth embodiment. For this reason, in the description of the sixth embodiment, the seal portion will be referred to as an information identification portion. Specifically, the seal part 1560 may be called a first seal part, and may be called a first information identification part. The seal portion 1561 may be referred to as a second seal portion, and may be referred to as a second information identification portion. The seal unit 1562 may be called a third information identification unit. Further, it is also possible to regard the entire seal portion as an aggregate of a plurality of information identification portions instead of as one information identification portion. For this reason, for example, when a manufacturer name, a model name, and a model number are displayed on the seal portion 1561, there may be a case where three information identification portions are included.

[Mounting part of ROM 502]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74C, the ROM 502 is detachably mounted on the control board 501 via a transparent socket (connector) 1801. FIG. 74-3 (a) is a plan view showing a state where the ROM is mounted on the transparent socket, and FIG. 74-3 (b) is a side view showing a state where the ROM is mounted on the transparent socket. In both figures, the control board 501 is omitted. The transparent socket 1801 has the same function as a normal socket, but has a height and the resin portion of the socket is formed of a transparent material. That is, even inside the socket, it is possible to visually check whether an incorrect wiring or the like is connected to the first signal pin 582 of the ROM 502. Thereby, the occurrence of fraudulent acts such as a so-called hanging substrate can be suppressed. Furthermore, in a state where the transparent socket 1801 is mounted on the control board 501, the pins 1802a of the transparent socket 1801 can be viewed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an incorrect wiring or the like from being connected to the pin 1802a. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

[Position Display Section 541] Cross-sectional view in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to the line CC in FIG. 74-1. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74-4 (d), the position display section 541 has a linear shape. It is a recess. FIG. 74D shows an arrow-direction cross section of the case portion 1803 at a position corresponding to the line CC in FIG. 74-1. As shown in FIG. 74D, the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1803 is slightly larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560, and is a linear concave portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1803. The concave portion is concave toward the rear side. A seal portion 1560 on which a printing portion 1571 is printed is attached to an outer surface 531 of the case portion 1803.

As a modified example of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, a position display portion 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portions 1103 and 1203, and the seal portion 1560 is provided on the outer surface 531 using the position indicator 541 as a mark. It may be attached (not shown). As another modified example, as shown in FIG. 74C, the position display section 541 may be a linear convex. FIG. 74-4 (c) shows a cross section in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to the line CC of FIG. As shown in FIG. 74-4 (c), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1807 is a linear projection formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1807, being slightly larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560. , Protruding forward. On the outer surface 531 of the case section 1807, a seal section 1560 on which a printing section 1571 is printed is attached. That is, the position display portions 541 described in the present paragraph and the preceding paragraph are formed by concave and / or convex on the inner surface 532.

  As described above, when the concave or / and convex position display portion is formed on the inner surface 532 and the seal portion 1560 is stuck to the outer surface 531, the position display portion 541 is in contact with the seal portion 1560 regardless of where the seal portion is stuck. Since there is no interference, it does not hinder the application. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector must confirm whether the seal is fraudulent, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display section 541, the inspector can easily check the printing section 1571 printed on the seal section 1560. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In the case where a seal portion is attached to the outer surface 531 and the position display portion 541 is provided on the inner surface 532, the position display portion 541 may include an outer edge of the seal portion 1560 attached to the outer surface 531 and / or an inner edge of the seal portion 1560, And / or may be formed to cross the inside and outside of the seal portion 1560. This will be described briefly. In FIG. 74-6, the position display portion 541a provided on the case portion 1820 is formed on the inner edge of the seal portion 1560. It is formed to cross the inside and outside. The portion of the position display portion 541 extending in the vertical direction in the figure is on the outer edge of the seal portion 1560, which can also be said to be formed so as to intersect inside and outside.

  As a modification of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74-2 (a), a seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1805, and the position display portion 541 is formed as a linear convex portion on the outer surface 531. It may be provided. FIG. 74-2 (a) shows a cross section in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 74-2 (a), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1805 is slightly larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 and is a linear convex portion formed on the outer surface 531. It is protruding. Inside the position display section 541, a seal section 1560 on which a print section 1571 is printed is attached.

  Since the position display portion 541 which is a linear convex portion is provided, for example, when the hand is touched, the position display portion 541 is compared with a case where the seal portion 1560 is attached to the planar case portion. Peeling can be prevented. That is, the seal portion 1560 can be used as a mark for sticking, and after sticking, the peeling of the seal portion 1560 can be prevented. If a part of the seal portion 1560 is peeled off, the inspector must check whether the seal portion 1560 is fraudulent, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display section 541, since the seal section 1560 is protected, the inspector can easily check the print section 1571 printed on the seal section 1560. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, as another modified example, as shown in FIG. 74-2 (b), the seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1806, and the position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. May be a linear concave portion. FIG. 74-2 (b) shows a cross-section in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 74-2 (b), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1806 is slightly larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560, and is a linear concave portion formed on the outer surface 531. It is a concave recess. Inside the position display section 541, a seal section 1560 on which a print section 1571 is printed is attached.

  As another modification, as shown in FIG. 74A, the seal 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case 1809, and the position display 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. May also be provided on the inner surface 532. FIG. 74-5 (a) shows a cross section in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. The position indicator 541 on the outer surface 531 protects the seal 1560, and the position indicator 541 on the inner surface 532 allows the seal 1560 to be attached to a more accurate position.

  Further, as another modified example, as shown in FIG. 74-5 (b), the seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1810, and the position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. May be a convex portion and a concave portion. FIG. 74-5 (b) shows a cross-section in the direction of the arrow at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. The seal portion 1560 can be further protected.

  The position display portion 541 is a convex portion and / or a concave portion, but may not be the convex portion and / or the concave portion as long as the position where the seal portion 1560 is attached can be displayed. The position display section 541 is formed at a position avoiding a later-described peeping section 1574. It should be noted that “formed” is not limited to being integrally formed, but also includes being attached by a seal or the like. Further, the position display section 541 may be an L-shaped one that displays the position of a part (corner) of the seal section 1560. The predetermined position on the back of the first surface 531 of the case 1803 does not only refer to the inner surface 532 of the case 1803. If it is assumed that the seal portion 1560 is attached without the substrate 501, the position display portion 541 may be provided on the inner case 40P. If it is assumed, the position display section 541 may be provided on the substrate.

[Seal 1560]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74-1, the seal portion 1560 on which the print portion 1571 is printed is lower than the light transmittance of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561, and can see through the electronic component 595. It has a predetermined light transmittance. The light transmittance of the seal portion 1560 does not need to be uniform. For example, light transmittance may be reduced by printing something like a pattern. In this case, even if the light transmittance is different in the portions, it is sufficient that the light transmittance is lower than that of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561 as a whole. Also in the present embodiment, a thin line pattern is printed in a hatched portion in the figure to reduce light transmittance. The fact that the light transmittance differs depending on the pattern will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 74-7. In FIG. 74-7 (a), the background of the seal portion 1560 has a wave-like pattern, and in FIG. 74-7 (b), the background of the seal portion 1560a has a lattice shape. Although both companies can see through the electronic component 595, it can be seen that the light transmittance is lower in FIG. 74-7 (a).

Note that the case portion 1803 has the highest predetermined light transmittance, and the seal portion 1561 has a predetermined light transmittance slightly lower than the light transmittance of the case portion 1803. Accordingly, the ROM 502 can be visually recognized by the light transmittance of the case portion 1803, and the electronic component 595 can be visually recognized by the light transmittance of the seal portion 1561 or the seal portion 1560. As a method of making the light transmittance of the seal portion 1561 lower than the light transmittance of the case portion 1803 or the seal portion 1561, the light transmittance of the material of the seal portion 1561 may be reduced, or the light may be transmitted by the printing portion 1571. Permeability may be reduced.

  As compared with the case where the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560 is equal to the light transmittance of the case portion 1551 and the seal portion 1561, forgery of the seal portion 1560 becomes more difficult, and occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Further, when the light transmittance is lowered by the pattern, it is not apparent at a glance that the light transmittance is lowered by the pattern, so that the forgery of the seal portion 1560 becomes more difficult, and the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74-1, a unique area that can be identified only when viewed from a predetermined angle is applied to a portion where a predetermined character is not attached instead of the colored area 1575 of the seal portion 1560. Information 1804 (K in the present embodiment) is displayed. In the present embodiment, characters are used, but symbols or figures may be used. The continuity of the pattern changes at the boundary between the first area 1814 where the unique information is formed by the pattern and the second area 1815 where the unique information is formed by the character and the pattern. According to this, forgery of the seal portion 1560 becomes more difficult, so that occurrence of fraud can be further suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved. Note that the seal unit 1560 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information.

  As shown in FIG. 74-2, at least one or more different electronic components 595 are attached to a range visible through the seal portion 1561 and a range visible through the seal portion 1560. By sticking a light-transmitting seal portion corresponding to the type of the electronic component 595, fraud can be easily detected and fraud can be made difficult. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The information described in the seal portion 1561 may include a model name, a model code, external terminal information, a maker name, a QR code (registered trademark), a rated voltage, power consumption, notes, and the like. In addition, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1560 are attached to a position having an angle at which the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized.

[First display, second display]
In the present embodiment, the case 1803 including the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the electronic component 595 is referred to as control means, and the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 are provided at different predetermined positions in the control means. ing. The first display 1371 and the second display 1372 have different distances from the surface 501a of the control board 501 on the side on which the ROM 502 is mounted until the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 are displayed. Note that the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 do not indicate only the identification display portion 1390, but are provided in the control means as shown in FIG. This is also included if the distance from the surface 501a is different. The surface 501a on the outer case 45P side of the control board 501, the opposite surface, the stamp of the inner case 40P, the stamp of the outer case 45P, various seals, and the like are assumed.

  However, the information identification unit and the display do not represent the same information. Note that the seal portion and the information identification portion are not synonymous, and a plurality of information identification portions may exist in one seal portion. For example, if the manufacturer name, model name, and model number are displayed on the seal portion 1561, there are three information identification portions. The relationship between the information identification unit and the display will be described with an example. For example, if the first information identification unit is a manufacturer name, the first display is not the manufacturer name, and thus, for example, the model name displayed on the seal unit. The second display is, for example, the model name displayed on the surface of the substrate 501 on the inner case 40P side. Note that the second information identification unit is, for example, the information on the opening of the seal unit 1560, and the third information identification unit is, for example, the manufacturer name of the seal unit 1562. Since the complicated first display and second display indicating that the distance from the control substrate is different are provided in the control means, forgery of the substrate 501 and the case portion 1803 can be prevented.

[Prizeball substrate 1811]
In the present embodiment, the award ball substrate 1811 and its case portion 1813 are included in the configuration of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 74-8, the prize ball substrate 1811 capable of bidirectional communication with the control substrate 501 is housed in a case portion 1813 having optical transparency. The ROM 1812 is mounted on the prize ball substrate 1811. A plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) different from the ROM 1812 are mounted on the award ball substrate 1811. The ROM 1812 stores data used for controlling a prize ball.

  A seal portion 1816 formed of a light-transmitting material is attached to the case portion 1813. On the seal portion 1816, a plurality of colored regions 1817, which are regions where light transmittance is reduced, are printed. In addition, the seal portion 1816 has a viewing portion 1819 that allows the user to look into the electronic component 595 in a portion where predetermined characters are not provided between the colored regions 1817. The seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1816 are light-transmissive so that the electronic component 595 can be seen through, and the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1816 have different light transmissivity. In this embodiment, the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560 is lower than that of the seal portion 1816. For example, the seal portion 1560 may have a wave-like pattern as shown in FIG. 74-7 (a), and the seal portion 1816 may have a lattice pattern as shown in FIG. 74-7 (b).

  Since the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560 is different from that of the seal portion 1816, it is difficult to forge the seal portions 1560 and 1816, and it is difficult to replace the case portions 1551 and 1813 with the incorrect substrates 501 and 1811. Can be. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Although not provided in the present embodiment, the case portion 1813 including the prize ball substrate 1811, the ROM 1812, and the electronic component 595 is a prize ball means, and the first and second display portions are provided at different predetermined positions in the prize ball means. A third display and a fourth display may be provided as in (1371, 1372).

[Direction board 1821]
In the present embodiment, the effect substrate 1821 and its case portion 1823 are included in the configuration of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 74-9, an effect board 1821 that can be effect-controlled by one-way communication from the control board 501 or the prize ball board 1811 is housed in a light-transmitting case 1823. A ROM 1822 is mounted on the effect board 1821. A plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) different from the ROM 1822 are mounted on the rendering board 1821. The ROM 1822 stores storage contents used for controlling the effect. The control board 501 and the prize ball board 1811 are foot-insert type boards as shown in FIG. 74-6, and the effect board 1821 is a surface mount type board. Examples of surface mounting include surface mounting on both sides, surface mounting on one side, surface mounting on the entire surface, and partial surface mounting.

  The case portion 1823 is formed of a light-transmitting material like the seal portion 1560, and is printed with a plurality of colored regions that are regions having reduced light transmittance. Is not affixed to a portion where the character is not attached, which has a peeping portion through which the electronic component 595 can be peeked. A seal portion having a colored region and a peep portion is not attached to the case portion 1823, but is attached only to the case portion 1803. Since the treatment of the seal portion is different in this manner, it is difficult to forge the seal portion 1560 and the case portion 1803, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind and the interest of the player is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the control substrate 501 may include a first region 1900a and a second region 1900b having a mode different from the first region 1900a. Here, the different aspect refers to a difference in which the distinction can be visually recognized. For example, an aspect based on a color such as a different color between the first area 1900a and the second area 1900b or a different shade of color. And a frame-like mode in which the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are surrounded by a line or a pattern, a mode in which the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are steps, and the like. One or a combination of can be used. For example, the resist applied to the surface of the control substrate 501 may have a green color in which the second region 1900b is darker or lighter than the first region 1900a. Further, it is preferable that the first area 1900a is set corresponding to a range where the ROM 502 and the electronic component 595 other than the ROM 502 are arranged on the control board 501. On the other hand, the second area 1900b is preferably set corresponding to a range where the control board 501 is not provided with the ROM 502, the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502, and the board mounted components such as the connectors 771 to 776. , May be set at the edge of the control board 501. In the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b, the above-described color and the like may be different. For example, the arrangement range of the ROM 502 and the arrangement range of the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502 on the control board 501 may be different. May be different. The first area 1900a and the second area 1900b can be provided on one or both of the mounting surface (rear surface) of the control board 501 and the front surface facing the back surface of the game board unit 12P. Further, the first region 1900a may be provided on one of the rear surface and the front surface of the control substrate 501, and the second region 1900b may be provided on the other of the rear surface and the front surface of the control substrate 501.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the control board 501 may be provided with an information identification unit 1902 for displaying specific information in the second area 1900b. Then, the information identification section 1902 may include an identification display 521 including the same information as the identification display 529 described above. As described above, by providing the information identification section 1902 in the second area 1900b having a different mode from the first area 1900a, the information displayed by the information identification section 1902 can be easily viewed. Therefore, the inspector can easily determine whether the control board 501 has been tampered with, and can easily manage the control board 501. Then, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  When the control board 501 is particularly distinguished, a plate body excluding board mounted components such as the mounted electronic components 502 and 595 may be referred to as a “board”, and a board on which the board mounted components are mounted is referred to as a “board”. Control unit ". The first region 1900a and the second region 1900b are preferably provided on the substrate, but regions having different modes may be provided on the board-mounted component.

  The configuration in which the above-described identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) in the identification display unit 1390 is different from the configuration shown in FIG. Instead, it is attached to a control unit such as an identification display 524 provided on the inner case 40P, an identification display 525 provided on the cap 8P, an identification display 521 provided on the control board 501, and an identification display 522 provided on the ROM 502. It can be applied to the identification display 520. The object to be divided into the layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 is not limited to the characters 1371 to 1376, and may be a display including a plurality of identifiers such as a graphic, a pattern, a code, and a combination of characters. For example, the relationship between the identification displays 520 may be divided into the levels 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 as described above.

  Although the positions of the layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 are described with respect to the object provided with the identification display 523 (in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390), if the identification display 523 provided on the outer case 45P, If the position is different in the thickness direction of the outer case 45P and the identification mark 524 provided on the inner case 40P, the position is different in the thickness direction of the inner case 40P and the identification mark 521 provided on the control board 501 or the board mounted component. , 522, the position is different in the thickness direction of the substrate. Then, it can be said that the identification mark 521 attached to the board and the identification mark 522 attached to the ROM 502 are located at different positions in the thickness direction of the board. It can be said that it is located at a different position in the thickness direction of the substrate from the identification displayed on the front surface. The outer case 45P constituting the surface on which the board-mounted components are mounted is further away from the board than the inner case 40P in order to secure the installation space for the board-mounted components, and the identification mark 523 attached to the outer case 45P. It can be said that the identification mark 524 attached to the inner case 40P is located at a different position in the thickness direction of the substrate.

  The identification display associated with each other is not limited to a mode in which a relationship can be directly recognized by a manufacturer or the like by visual recognition, and can be compared with information held by an administrator or the like, converted by a device held by the administrator, or the like. By doing so, the relationship may be such that the relevance can be grasped. For example, even if the identifications 523 to 525 attached to the board case 3P do not include the identifiers matching the identifications 521 and 522 attached to the control board 501, the information owned by the administrator is referred to. In this case, both identification indicators 520 include common information. In other words, the identification displays associated with each other may include a mode in which the relevance can be directly grasped from the information recognizable by visual recognition, and a mode in which the relevancy cannot be directly grasped from the information recognizable by visual recognition. . In this manner, since the relevance between the identification displays is not apparent at a glance, it is difficult to rewrite by anyone other than the manufacturer or the administrator, and the possibility of fraud can be reduced, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

  In the present case, “first display”, “second display”, “third display”, “fourth display”, “first information display”, “second information display”, “first information identification unit”, The “second information identifying unit”, “third information identifying unit”, and “fourth information identifying unit” are not limited to those described in the above embodiment, but may be a sticker, code information or characters printed on a sticker, or a case. It is possible to adopt a general display method and display contents of information relating to a gaming machine on a board or a board case, such as an engraved mark, a model name, a manufacturer name, board management information, and case management information.

<Contents of the invention described in the first embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a start condition is satisfied, determination information as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is obtained, and the determination information is stored. When the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and a variation effect is executed according to the result of the determination, and a special game is executed when the variation effect has a special result. Some of such gaming machines display a hold image corresponding to undetermined determination information (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33530). In addition, the gaming machine improves the interest of the game by changing the normal reserved image into a reserved image in a display mode suggesting a possibility that the variable effect may have a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine in order to enhance the interest of the game.

As a first configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a command from the main control means The main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player in a gaming machine having a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) for controlling the production of the game based on the game. (Main CPU 110a), and a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the judgment, wherein the slave control means includes a holding image (holding icon) corresponding to the held right. Display means (display / voice control unit 140) for displaying on the display means (first image display device 70), and a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) ) An effect execution unit (display / voice control unit 140) for executing the notification sound), wherein the image display unit is configured to update an image displayed on the display unit every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) for changing the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game, and the change effect is transmitted from the main control unit. A first change effect (a change effect at the time of a prize) executed at a frame update timing in response to the reception of the transmitted command (starting port prize designation command) indicating that the right has been generated; A second change effect (normal change pattern) to be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a command indicating the result of the determination (change pattern designation command) 2, the character effect change pattern 01 and the symbol effect change pattern 01), wherein the effect executing means starts the notification effect at a frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, and The notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the effect ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a command from the main control means The main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player in a gaming machine having a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) for controlling the production of the game based on the game. (Main CPU 110a), a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the judgment, and a fluctuation control means for changing and displaying the symbol based on the result of the judgment and then stopping and displaying the symbol. Wherein the slave control means displays on the display means (the first image display device 70) a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the held right. 140), and effect execution means (display / voice control unit 140) for causing the effect means (audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) in the course of the game, The image display unit is configured to update an image to be displayed on the display unit every time a predetermined frame update timing comes, and from the reserved image to a special reserved image indicating a possibility of performing the special game or not. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) for changing, and in the change effect, reception of a command (change pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit and indicating that the symbol change display is started. A first change effect (normal change pattern 01) to be executed at a frame update timing according to the command and a command indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. A second change effect (a normal change pattern 02, a character effect change pattern 01, and a symbol effect change pattern 01) to be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the (variation pattern designation command), and the effect execution means. Starts the notification effect at a frame update timing at which the first change effect starts, and ends the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. . By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a command from the main control means The main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player in a gaming machine having a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) for controlling the production of the game based on the game. (Main CPU 110a), a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the judgment, and a fluctuation control means for changing and displaying the symbol based on the result of the judgment and then stopping and displaying the symbol. (Main CPU 110a), and the slave control means includes a pre-judgment reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved right, and after the determination is performed on the right. An image display means (display / voice control unit 140) for displaying the post-judgment pending image (the icon) corresponding to the right on the display means (first image display device 70); An effect execution unit (display / voice control unit 140) for causing the output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display unit has a predetermined frame update timing. An image to be displayed on the display means is updated every time, and the special reserved image before the determination or the special after the determination indicating the possibility of performing the special game from the reserved image before the determination or the reserved image after the determination. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) for changing to a reserved image, wherein the change effect is a frame transmitted from the main control means when the change display of the symbol starts. Of the first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing according to the command (change pattern specification command) and the command (change pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control means and indicating the result of the determination. A second change effect (a normal change pattern 02, a character effect change pattern 01, and a symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after reception, and the effect execution means includes Starting the notification effect at a frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, ending the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, The case of changing to the special reserved image after the determination is better than the case of changing to the second The rate at which change effects are executed is high. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control unit (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a command from the main control unit The main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. (Main RAM 110c) capable of retaining a predetermined number of rights for the determination, and the sub control means includes a reserved image (reserved image) corresponding to the reserved right. Icon) on the display means (first image display device 70) and a predetermined notification effect (icon output) on the effect means (audio output device 9) during the progress of the game. Effect (display / voice control unit 140) for executing (change) notification sound), wherein the image display unit updates an image displayed on the display unit every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) for changing from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game, and the change effect is held A first change effect executed at a frame update timing according to a command (start-up winning award designation command, variation pattern designation command, special symbol storage designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the number of the right changes. (Change effect at the time of winning, normal change pattern 01) and a command (change pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit and indicating the result of the determination. And a second change effect (a normal change pattern 02, a character effect change pattern 01, and a symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the special hold image. Has a first display mode (blue character icon) and a second display mode (red character icon) that is more likely to play the special game than the first display mode, and the effect execution means Starting the notification effect at a frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, ending the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, It is easier to change to the second display mode when the second change effect is executed than when the change effect is executed, and the first change effect When the second display mode is changed to the second display mode, the special game is played when the number of the reserved rights is the second number larger than the first number than when the right is held. Is likely to do so. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The “special holding image” and “special holding image before judgment” are those having a shape changed from the normal holding icon, those having changed colors, and colors around the holding icon indicating the jackpot winning expectation. An effect is displayed, a character indicating a jackpot winning expectation is displayed around (near) the hold icon, and a character image (for example, “SP”) indicating an effect to be executed is displayed around (near) the hold icon. And “pseudo-reams”).

  In addition, the `` special holding image after determination '' is an image in which the shape has been changed from the normal icon, an image in which the color has been changed, an effect in which a color effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed around the icon, A character that indicates the jackpot winning expectation is displayed around (near) the icon, and a character image (for example, “SP” or “pseudo-ren”) that indicates an effect to be executed around (near) the icon. ) Is included.

The “first display mode” includes a special icon (flashing CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
The “second display mode” includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

  The “hold image after determination” and the “special hold image after determination” are displayed from the start to the end of the variable effect, are displayed for a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect, and The specific period (SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) during the performance includes the display being erased.

<Contents of the invention described in the second embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, the determination information acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition is stored as a hold memory, and it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Generally, a variable effect is executed on the basis of this. In such a gaming machine, by performing an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold storage, or by displaying an execution image corresponding to the hold storage in which the variable effect has been executed, There have been games that allow a player to grasp the progress of a game (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1 has a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of pending storage when the number of pending storage changes.

As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and a sub-control means (a main control means for controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control means) Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by establishment of the acquisition condition (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port). A determination unit that can determine whether to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a storage unit that can store the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as hold storage, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device); first holding information (hold number) indicating the number of the holding storage; Corresponding to each of the pending memories Information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier, wherein the image display means updates the display image every time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, The information display means can execute a decrease display of the first hold information and a decrease display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storages decreases, and display the decrease display of the second hold information (hold) The reduction display of the first hold information (update to the hold number minus 1) is completed before the frame update timing at which the movement of the adjacent display unit in the icon display area to the center is completed. The frame update timing is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means (controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by establishment of the acquisition condition (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port). A determination unit that can determine whether to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a storage unit that can store the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as hold storage, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device); first holding information (hold number) indicating the number of the holding storage; Corresponding to each of the pending memories Information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier, wherein the image display means updates the display image every time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, The information display means includes, when the number of the hold storages decreases, a decrease display of the first hold information, and a change display for changing the second hold information in which the variable effect has been started to execution information (the icon). Can be executed, and the change of the second suspension information to the execution information (movement from the suspension icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed more than the first frame update timing. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of the hold information (update to the hold number obtained by subtracting 1) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means (controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by establishment of the acquisition condition (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port). A determination unit that can determine whether to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a storage unit that can store the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as hold storage, The secondary control means, a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device); first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of the holding storage; Corresponding to each of the pending memories Information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier, wherein the image display means updates the display image every time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, The information display means can execute a decrease display of the first suspension information and a decrease display of the second suspension information when the number of the suspension memories decreases, and when the number of the suspension memories increases, An increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information can be executed, and when the number of the hold storages increases during the decrease display of the second hold information, the second hold information is displayed. Even before the frame update timing at which the decrease display (movement to the center of the next display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed, the increase display of the first hold information (to the hold number added by one). Update There has been adapted to be started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means (controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by establishment of the acquisition condition (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port). A determination unit that can determine whether to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a storage unit that can store the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as hold storage, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device); first holding information (hold number) indicating the number of the holding storage; Corresponding to each of the pending memories Information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier, wherein the image display means updates the display image every time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, The information display means includes: a decrease display of the first suspension information when the number of the suspension storages decreases; and a change display for changing the second suspension information for which the variable display has been started to execution information (the icon). Can be executed, and when the number of the hold information increases, the increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information can be executed, and during the change display of the second hold information, When the number of the reserved storages increases, before the frame update timing at which the reduced display (movement from the reserved icon display area to the center of the icon display area) of the second reserved information is completed. What also increase the display of the first suspension information (updated to 1 summed hold digits) is adapted to be started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means (controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by establishment of the acquisition condition (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port). A determination unit that can determine whether to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a storage unit that can store the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as hold storage, The secondary control means, a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device); first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of the holding storage; Corresponding to each of the pending memories Information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier, wherein the image display means updates the display image every time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, The information display means is capable of executing an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storages increases, and the hold storage during the execution of the variable effect. Is increased, the first suspension information is displayed more than the frame update timing at which the increase display of the second suspension information (enlargement of the suspension icon additionally displayed in the suspension icon display area to the normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increase display of information (update to the reserved digit with 1 added) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means (controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by establishment of the acquisition condition (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port). A determination unit that can determine whether to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a storage unit that can store the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as hold storage, The secondary control means, a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device); first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of the holding storage; Corresponding to each of the pending memories Information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier, wherein the variable effect execution means includes a specific effect (SP) for expecting execution of the special game during execution of the variable effect. Reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full-rotation reach effect), and the information display means increases the first hold information and increases the second hold information when the number of the hold memories increases. And when the number of the on-hold storage increases during the execution of the specific effect, an increase display of the first on-hold information (update to the on-hold number added by 1) is executed, The increase display of the second hold information is not executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the specific effect is completed, the lost effect symbol or the big hit effect symbol that has been reduced and displayed is enlarged and displayed). By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

As a seventh configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means (controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control means ( Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by establishment of the acquisition condition (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port). Determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player; storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as on-hold storage; Game state control means that can be controlled to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the slave control means displays a variable effect according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image Display device) Information display means capable of displaying dynamic effect execution means, first hold information (hold number) indicating the number of the hold storage, and second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages Wherein the information display means can execute an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storages increases, and the storage means, The determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering a game ball into the first starting port) is stored as a first hold memory, and the second acquisition condition is established (input of a game ball into the second starting port). The determination information based on the ball is stored as a second hold memory, and when the number of the first hold memories increases in the specific game state, an increase display of the first hold information (1 Update) is executed, but the second hold information is increased. Shows a predetermined condition is satisfied (the last variation effect in a particular game mode ends normally return to the playing state) so as not be performed until the. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

<Contents of the invention described in the third embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition, and based on the determination result, a fluctuating effect of the effect symbol is displayed as an image. What is executed by the device is common. In such a gaming machine, there are a plurality of variation patterns of the variation effect of the effect symbol, and the variation effect of the effect symbol in the selected variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result. It was displayed on a display device (for example, see JP-A-2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is room for improvement in the mode of the effect of changing the effect symbol, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be reduced.

◆ As a first configuration of a gaming machine for solving the above-described problem, a symbol (special symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on establishment of a starting condition, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed with a predetermined specific symbol, a player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, a variation effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the symbol variation display. And, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a variable effect control means (effect control board 130) controllable to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol, The variation effect control means is capable of recognizing the effect symbol in all of a plurality of rows during swing display of the symbol and swingable in a recognizable display mode (fluctuation end suggestion effect, FIG. 50-2 ( c), 52-2 (d)) and a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of a plurality of columns. A stop effect can be executed, and the stop display mode is such that at least two of the first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the stop effect is stopped and displayed in different effect symbols in each of the plurality of columns are common. In the second state (variation patterns 2A to 3C) stopped and displayed in the effect symbol, the execution time of the first time differs between the first state and the second state. It is possible to control so that the mode of a predetermined effect (effect indicating change end) in the effect symbol during the first time is different. By doing so, the interest of the game can be improved.

と し て As a second configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problem, a symbol (special symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on establishment of a starting condition, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, a variation effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the symbol variation display. And, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a variable effect control means (effect control board 130) controllable to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol, The variation effect control means is capable of recognizing the effect symbol in all of a plurality of rows during the symbol variation display and swingable recognizable display mode (fluctuation end suggestion effect, FIG. 50-2 ( c), 52-2 (d)) and a common display mode (first display mode) in which, during the variable display of the symbol, the effect symbol common to two of the plurality of columns is stopped and displayed. , A stop effect can be executed according to the second time when the first variation effect (variation patterns 2A to 2C) is executed, and the special game is executed from the first variation effect. There is a case in which a second variation effect (variation patterns 3A to 3C) having a high degree of expectation for being executed is executed, and the case in which the first variation effect is executed and the case in which the second variation effect is executed are different. In addition, it is possible to control the execution time of the first time to be different and to change the mode of a predetermined effect (effect indicating change end) in the effect symbol during the first time. By doing so, the interest of the game can be improved.

As a third configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problem, a symbol (special symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on establishment of a starting condition, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, a variation effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the symbol variation display. And, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a variable effect control means (effect control board 130) controllable to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol, During the fluctuation display of the symbol, the effect symbol can be recognized in all of the plurality of rows and the rockable recognizable display mode (fluctuation end suggestion effect, FIGS. 50-2 (c), (e), FIG. 52-1 (d) A stop effect can be executed in the first time of executing FIGS. 52-2 (d) and 53 (e), and predetermined effects (battle effect, resurrection effect, pseudo-sequence effect) for gradually increasing the degree of expectation are provided. ) And the case where the predetermined effect is not executed. The execution time of the first time is different between the case where the predetermined effect is executed and the case where the predetermined effect is not executed. In addition, it is possible to control the predetermined effect (fluctuation end suggestion effect) in the effect symbol during the first time to be different. By doing so, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ As a fourth configuration of a gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problem, a symbol (special symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on establishment of a starting condition, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, a variation effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the symbol variation display. And, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a variable effect control means (effect control board 130) controllable to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol, The variation effect control means is capable of recognizing the effect symbol in all of a plurality of rows and swinging during the variable display of the symbol (recognizable display mode (variation end suggestion effect, FIG. 52-1)). d), 53 (e)) and a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of a plurality of columns, and a stop effect can be executed. There are a case where the recognizable display mode is executed a plurality of times during the change of the symbol (a pseudo continuous effect, a resurrection effect), and a case where the predetermined effect is not executed. In the case where the predetermined effect is performed, the execution time of the first time is extended and the stop effect is more likely to be stopped and displayed in the specific effect symbol than in the case where the predetermined effect is not executed. Is controllable. By doing so, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ As a fifth configuration of the gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problem, a symbol (special symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on establishment of a starting condition, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, a variation effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the symbol variation display. And, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a variable effect control means (effect control board 130) controllable to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol, The variation effect control means is capable of recognizing the effect symbol in all of a plurality of rows during the symbol variation display and swingable recognizable display mode (fluctuation end suggestion effect, FIG. 50-2 ( c), 52-2 (d)), and a stop effect is executed by a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of a plurality of columns. It is possible that the stop display mode is such that a first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which each of the plurality of columns is stopped and displayed in a different one of the effect symbols, and the effect symbol common to at least two of the plurality of columns. There is a second state (variation patterns 2A to 3C) stopped and displayed in the second state. In the second state, the execution time of the first time is made longer than in the first state, and the recognizable display is performed. It is possible to control so that a predetermined effect (battle effect, resurrection effect, pseudo-sequence effect) for improving the degree of expectation is easily executed before the execution of the mode. By doing so, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ As a sixth configuration of a gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problem, a symbol (special symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on establishment of a start condition, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, a player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, a variation effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the symbol variation display. And, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a variable effect control means (effect control board 130) controllable to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol, The variation effect control means is capable of recognizing the effect symbol in all of a plurality of rows during the symbol variation display and swingable recognizable display mode (fluctuation end suggestion effect, FIG. 50-2 ( e), 52-1 (d), FIG. 53 (e)), and a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of a plurality of columns. , A stop effect can be executed, and the stop display mode includes a first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the different effect symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of columns, and a stop display in the specific effect symbol. There is a second state (variation patterns 4A to 5C) that is performed, and the second state makes the execution time of the first time longer than the first state and executes the recognizable display mode. It is possible to control so that a predetermined effect (battle effect, resurrection effect, pseudo-sequence effect) for improving the degree of expectation is easily executed before. By doing so, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ As a seventh configuration of a gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problem, a symbol (special symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on establishment of a starting condition, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, a variation effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the symbol variation display. And, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a variable effect control means (effect control board 130) controllable to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol, The fluctuation effect control unit executes a recognizable display mode (a fluctuation end suggestion effect or the like) in which the effect symbol can be recognized and swingable in all of a plurality of columns during the variable display of the symbol. 1 o'clock And a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of columns, a stop effect can be executed, and the stop display mode is in a first state. (Variation patterns 1A to 1C) and a second state (variation patterns 2A to 3C) different from the first state, wherein the second state is the recognizable display mode as compared with the first state. Can be controlled so that a predetermined effect (effect indicating change end) is easily executed during the execution of. By doing so, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ As an eighth configuration of a gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problem, a symbol (special symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on establishment of a start condition, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, a player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, a variation effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the symbol variation display. And, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a variable effect control means (effect control board 130) controllable to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol, The fluctuation effect control unit executes a recognizable display mode (a fluctuation end suggestion effect or the like) in which the effect symbol can be recognized and swingable in all of a plurality of columns during the variable display of the symbol. 1 o'clock And a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of columns, a stop effect can be executed, and the stop display mode includes the specific effect. There is a first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) stopped and displayed in the effect symbol different from the symbol, and a second state (variation patterns 4A to 5C) stopped and displayed in the specific effect symbol. The second state can be controlled such that a predetermined effect (effect indicating change end) is more easily performed during execution of the recognizable display mode than in the first state. By doing so, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ As a ninth configuration of a gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problem, a symbol (special symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on establishment of a starting condition, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, a variation effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the symbol variation display. And, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a variable effect control means (effect control board 130) controllable to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol, The fluctuation effect control unit executes a recognizable display mode (a fluctuation end suggestion effect or the like) in which the effect symbol can be recognized and swingable in all of a plurality of columns during the variable display of the symbol. 1 o'clock And a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of columns, and a stop effect can be performed. There is a first state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) that is stopped and displayed with different effect symbols in each of the above, and a second state (variation patterns 4A to 5C) that is stopped and displayed with the specific effect symbol. The first state can be controlled such that a predetermined effect (effect indicating change end) is less likely to be performed during execution of the recognizable display mode than in the second state. By doing so, the interest of the game can be improved.

As a tenth configuration of a gaming machine for solving the above-mentioned problem, a symbol (special symbol TZ) is variably displayed based on establishment of a starting condition, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, a player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, a variation effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) to be displayed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) is executed during the symbol variation display. And, when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a variable effect control means (effect control board 130) controllable to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol, The fluctuation effect control unit executes a recognizable display mode (a fluctuation end suggestion effect or the like) in which the effect symbol can be recognized and swingable in all of a plurality of columns during the variable display of the symbol. 1 Is capable of executing a stop effect between, in a high probability state and a low probability state, aspects of the predetermined effect in the performance symbols in the first hour (variation terminated suggested effect) can be controlled differently. By doing so, the interest of the game can be improved.

◆ [Invention 1]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) according to a first aspect of the present invention includes a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a storage unit (board) that houses the control board and has light transmittance. A case 1700), a control unit (assembly 2P) having: a seal unit (seal unit 1710) affixed to the storage unit and formed of a light-transmitting material; A first information display unit (a description area 1570, a code unit 1712, and an information display unit 1713) for displaying information about the control unit, and information on the control unit provided at a position different from the seal unit in the storage unit; And a second information display section (date mark section 1720) for displaying a plurality of colored areas (printing section 1) which are areas where the light transmittance is reduced. 11, a plurality of regions 1575) and a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. And a visible area (viewing section 1574) in which the control board stored in the storage section can be viewed.

  According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 as in Invention 1, the opening date described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 The displayed date of manufacture is different information but has a predetermined time-series relationship. Specifically, the date of opening described in the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 is always a newer date than the date of manufacture displayed on the date mark portion 1720. Therefore, the inspector confirms the consistency between the date of opening of the description area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date of manufacture of the date mark portion 1720, thereby preventing an unauthorized act such as an unauthorized exchange of a control board. It can be easily confirmed.

◆ [Invention 2]
A game machine (game machine 1P) according to a second aspect of the present invention includes a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a light-transmissive housing section (board) for housing the control board. Case 1700), a control means (assembly 2P) having a first seal portion (seal portion 1710) affixed to the storage portion and made of a light-transmitting material, and a first seal portion. A first information display unit (a code unit 1712, an information display unit 1713) and a second information display unit (a description area 1570) for displaying information on the control unit, and the first seal unit in the storage unit And a third information display section (code section 17) provided on the second seal section for displaying information on the control means. 2), wherein the first information display section and the third information display section each include an identification display in a predetermined mode readable by a terminal, and the second information display section includes Of a plurality of colored regions (the printing unit 1711 and the plurality of regions 1575), which are regions in which is reduced, and a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. The third information display section, wherein the third information display section has a visible area (a peeping section 1574) in which a predetermined character is not attached between the control boards and in which the control board stored in the storage section can be viewed. In the thickness direction of the storage section, the distance from a virtual plane where the control board is extended in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the storage section is different from the virtual plane to the first information display section. Gist that it is provided differently from the distance To.

  According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the unsealing-prohibited seal portion 1730 as in the second aspect, the information displayed on the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720 is opened. It is linked with the information displayed on the prohibition seal part 1730. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm an improper act such as an improper exchange of the control board by confirming the consistency between the information of the seal portion 1720 and the information of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730. Further, the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 is different from the virtual surface in the thickness direction of the board case 1700 by extending the control substrate 1705 in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction. The distance is different from the distance between the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720. Therefore, the inspector can compare the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730 with the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 of the seal portion 1720 at the same height and on the same plane. The information in the code portion 1732 of the opening prohibition seal portion 1730, the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720, and the information display portion 1713 can be easily visually recognized, and it is possible to easily confirm an improper act such as an improper control board exchange.

◆ [Invention 3]
A gaming machine (game machine 1P) according to a third aspect of the present invention includes a control means (assembly 2P) having a control board (control boards 501 and 1705) and a storage section (board cases 1551 and 1700) for storing the control board, and A first information display (character 1371 of the identification display 523) and a second information display (character 1374 of the identification display 523) provided in the means, and are provided in the thickness direction of the storage unit from the top surface of the storage unit. The point is that the distance to the first information display is different from the distance from the top surface of the storage section to the second information display.

  According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 in the identification display 523 as in Invention 3, the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 are at different levels in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390. Therefore, the characters 1371 on the layer 1381 and the characters 1372 on the layer 1382 are formed so that the distance from the top surface of the board case 1700 is different. Since the identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, the identification mark 523 is removed, for example, as compared with a case where the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, since the identification mark 523 is provided at a position where the distance from the top surface in the thickness direction of the substrate case 1700 is different, that is, divided and provided in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification mark 523 is formed only in one layer. It is difficult to remove compared to the case. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed by fraud or the like, the substrate case 1700 will be conspicuously damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be said to be easy and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Further, the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 are separated from each other when viewed from the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the assembly 2P because the characters 1371 and 1372 have no overlapping portion in plan view and are separated from each other. Both the character 1372 and the character 1372 can be bird's eye view, and it is also possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of an illegal act on the control board 1705 or the like.

◆ [Invention 4]
A gaming machine (game machine 1P) according to a fourth aspect of the present invention includes a control means (assembly 2P) having a control board (control boards 501, 1705) and a storage section (board cases 1551, 1700) for storing the control board. A first information display (character 1371 of the identification display 523) and a second information display (character 1374 of the identification display 523) provided on the means, and a predetermined surface of the control substrate in a thickness direction of the control substrate. The point is that the distance from the control information to the first information display is different from the distance from a predetermined surface of the control board to the second information display.

  According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the invention 4, the characters 1371 and the characters 1372 have different levels in the thickness direction of the identification display unit 1390. Therefore, the characters 1371 of the hierarchy 1381 and the characters 1372 of the hierarchy 1382 are formed on a predetermined surface of the control board 1705 (for example, a virtual plane obtained by extending the control board 1705 in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction). Surface). Since the identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case portion 1700, the identification mark 523 is removed, for example, as compared with a case where the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface or the inner surface of the case portion. It is difficult. In addition, since the identification mark 523 is provided at a position different in distance from a predetermined surface of the control board 1705, that is, divided into a plurality of layers in the thickness direction, the identification mark 523 is formed only in one layer. It is more difficult to remove. With such an identification mark 523, if it is removed by fraud or the like, the substrate case 1700 will be conspicuously damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be said to be easy and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Further, the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 are separated from each other when viewed from the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the assembly 2P because the characters 1371 and 1372 have no overlapping portion in plan view and are separated from each other. Both the character 1372 and the character 1372 can be bird's eye view, and it is also possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of an illegal act on the control board 1705 or the like.

◆ [Invention 5]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) according to a fifth aspect of the present invention includes a control board (control boards 501 and 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and the control board for visually recognizing the plurality of electronic components. A storage part (substrate case 1551, 1700) that stores and has light transmissivity, and a first information display part (code parts 1572, 1712, information display parts 1573, 1713) attached to the storage part and displaying predetermined information. ) And a second information display section (a description area 1570), wherein the first information display section is displayed in a first mode including specific information and in a second mode different from the first mode, The second information display unit is formed of a material having light transmissivity, and includes a plurality of colored regions (printing units 1571 and 1711, a plurality of regions 1575) which are regions where the light transmissivity is reduced, and the second information display unit. Colored area of Wherein a first colored region of the inner and the first color region A between the different second colored region, and summarized in that having, between the control board and visible region (viewing unit 1574).

  In the case of the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 as in the fifth aspect, the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 and the character string of the information display portion 1713 are linked to each other as described above. And information including the same specific information is displayed in different modes. Therefore, it is difficult for the code part 1712 to be fraudulent, and even if the information in the information display part 1713 has been tampered with, the inspector can check the consistency with the code part 1712 to easily determine the presence or absence of fraud. As well as deterrence of wrongdoing. Further, in the seal portion 1720, since the peeping portion 1574 is formed between the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713 and the writing area 1570, the illegal operation is performed on the control board 1705 as described above. Since it is possible to easily confirm whether the information has been tampered with, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud.

◆ [Invention 6]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 6 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A first light transmissive case part (1803) enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A seal portion (1560) provided on the case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the seal portion is reduced,
The seal portion,
Having a second light transmittance lower than the first light transmittance and capable of visually recognizing the electronic component;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the case portion. The gist of the present invention is to have a peep portion (1574) that allows the electronic component to be peeked through the second light transmittance.

  Since the peep portion is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component via the peep portion. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the electronic component has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the peeping unit is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved. Further, since a plurality of colored areas are provided, for example, the name of the inspector and the date of opening the board case can be described. In addition, the inspector can also write, in the area, the date on which the control board has confirmed whether or not the illegal operation has been performed. Further, since the peeping portion is provided between the regions, the region is more conspicuous than when only the region is provided. For this reason, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters and the like written in the area. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with confidence. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved. Further, since the light transmittance of the seal portion is lower than the light transmittance of the case portion, it is difficult to forge the seal portion, and it is possible to make it difficult to perform an illegal act of replacing the entire case portion with an incorrect substrate. Thereby, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 7-1]
A gaming machine (1) according to Invention 7-1 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A light-transmitting case portion (1803) enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A seal portion (1560) provided on the first surface of the case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A position display section (541) formed at a predetermined position located on the back side of the first surface of the case section and serving as a mark for a position where the seal section is to be mounted;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the seal portion is reduced,
The seal portion,
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the case portion. The gist of the present invention is to have a peeping portion (1574) capable of peeking at the electronic component.

  In this case, the manufacturer can position the identification display along the position display section. For this reason, when mass-producing a gaming machine, the manufacturer can attach an identification display to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines. Since the identification display is provided at the same position among a plurality of gaming machines, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  Further, since the position display portion is formed on the inner surface side and the seal portion is attached to the outer surface, no matter where the seal portion is attached, the position display portion does not interfere with the seal portion. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector must confirm whether the seal is fraudulent, and the inspection takes time. However, with such a position display section, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display attached to the board case. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 7-2]
In addition, the gaming machine according to Invention 7-2 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A light-transmitting case portion (1803) enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A seal portion (1560) provided on the first surface of the case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A position display portion (541), which is a protrusion or / and a recess formed on the outer surface of the seal portion on the first surface of the case portion and serves as a mark for a position where the seal portion is to be mounted;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the seal portion is reduced,
The seal portion,
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the case portion. The gist of the present invention is to have a peeping portion (1574) capable of peeking at the electronic component.

  In this case, the manufacturer can position the identification display along the position display section. For this reason, when mass-producing a gaming machine, the manufacturer can attach an identification display to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines. Since the identification display is provided at the same position among a plurality of gaming machines, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  In addition, since the outer surface to which the seal portion is attached is provided with a convex portion formed on the outer edge of the seal portion and / or a position display portion which is a concave portion, for example, when a hand touches the substrate case, The peeling of the seal can be prevented as compared with the case where the seal portion is attached to the flat surface. If a part of the seal is peeled off, the inspector must confirm whether the seal is fraudulent, and the inspection takes time. However, such a position display portion protects the seal portion, so that the inspector can easily confirm the identification display attached to the substrate case. Therefore, occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 8]
A gaming machine (1) according to an eighth aspect of the present invention includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A first light-transmitting storage section (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
The second information identification unit includes:
Light transmittance is lower than the first light transmittance, and the second light transmittance is formed so that the electronic component can be visually recognized;
A plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions where the light transmittance is lower than the second light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. A glance portion (1574) that allows the electronic component to be glanced through the second light transmittance.

  In this case, the examiner can easily confirm that the wrongdoing has not been performed by checking the storage unit displaying the same identification and the storage unit. In addition, even if the storage means is replaced by another storage means due to fraud, for example, the examiner can determine whether or not the identification display provided on the storage means and the storage unit is the same. , It can be easily confirmed that the wrongdoing has taken place. For this reason, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 9-1]
A gaming machine (1) according to Invention 9-1 includes: a board (501) for controlling a game;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A light-transmitting storage part (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided on the first surface of the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A position display unit (541) formed at a predetermined position located on the back side of the first surface of the storage unit and serving as a mark of a position where the second information identification unit is mounted;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
The second information identification unit includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance, and are regions where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. A gaze portion (1574) that can gaze at the electronic component.

◆ [Invention 9-2]
A gaming machine (1) according to Invention 9-2 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A light-transmitting storage part (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided on the first surface of the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1598) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A position display section (541), which is a protrusion or / and a recess formed on the outer surface of the second information identification section on the first surface of the storage section and serves as a mark for a position where the second information identification section is to be mounted. ) And
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
The second information identification unit includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance, and are regions where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. A gaze portion (1574) that can gaze at the electronic component.

◆ [Invention 10]
A gaming machine (1) according to a tenth aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A light-transmitting case portion (1803) enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A first seal portion (1561) and a second seal portion (1560), which are provided on the case portion and are formed of a material having a light transmitting property;
The second seal portion includes:
Light transmittance is lower than the first seal portion, and is formed with a predetermined light transmittance so that the electronic component can be visually recognized,
A plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions having light transmittance lower than the predetermined light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the case portion. A peeping part (1574) capable of peeping the electronic component by the predetermined light transmittance;
The gist is that it has.

  According to the present invention, since the light transmittance of the second seal portion is lower than the light transmittance of the first seal portion, it is difficult to forge the second seal portion, and the case is replaced with an incorrect substrate. Acts can be difficult. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 11]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 11 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A light-transmitting storage part (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) that are provided in the storage unit and are formed of a material having optical transparency and that display specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
The second information identification unit includes:
Light transmittance is lower than the first information identification portion, and is formed with a predetermined light transmittance so that the electronic component can be visually recognized;
A plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions having light transmittance lower than the predetermined light transmittance;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. A peeping part (1574) capable of peeping the electronic component by the predetermined light transmittance;
The gist is that it has.

◆ [Invention 12]
A gaming machine (1) according to a twelfth aspect includes a control unit including a substrate (501) and electronic components (502, 595) provided on the substrate (501), and a plurality of members (511) including the control unit. And a case part (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) including the electronic component (502, 502) on the substrate (501) in the case part (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551). The member (45P) constituting the mounting surface side of the substrate (595) is used as an identification (523) associated with the identification (521, 522) attached to the control unit in the thickness direction of the substrate (501). The gist is that a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) having different distances from the substrate (501) are provided.

  In this case, since the identification of the board and the identification of the case are related, if the board is replaced illegally, the identification of the board and the identification of the case may be different. In addition, it becomes easier for the inspector to detect fraudulent activities. Further, the identification display is provided at a position where the distance from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate is different, that is, provided in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction so that the identification display is formed only in one layer. It can be harder to remove. With such identification, if the identification is removed by fraud, the case will be noticeably damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be easily found and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 13]
A gaming machine (1) according to Invention 13 includes a control unit including a substrate (501) and electronic components (502, 595) provided on a mounting surface of the substrate (501), and a plurality of members ( 511) and a case (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551), and the substrate (501) as an identification (520) attached to the control and associated with each other. A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) attached so that the distance from the mounting surface in the thickness direction of the substrate is different, and the distance of the substrate (501) from the mounting surface in the thickness direction is different. , Has a third display (1375) attached to be the same as the second display (1372).

  In this case, since the identifications of the control means are related to each other, if the substrate is exchanged improperly, the identification of the substrate and the identification of the case are different from each other. It is easier to find actions. Further, the identification display is provided at a position where the distance from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate is different, that is, provided in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction so that the identification display is formed only in one layer. It can be harder to remove. With such identification, if the identification is removed by fraud, the case will be noticeably damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be easily found and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 14]
A gaming machine (1) according to a fourteenth aspect includes a control unit including a substrate (501) and electronic components (502, 595) provided on the substrate (501), and a plurality of members (511) including the control unit. And a case portion (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) including the case portion (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551). 521, 522), a first display (1371) and a second display (1372), which are provided so that the positions in the thickness direction of the substrate (501) are different, are attached. The control unit includes the identification display (520) related to the identification display (523) attached to the case unit (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551). Therefore, a third display and a fourth display, which are provided so that the positions in the thickness direction of the substrate are different, are provided.

  In this case, since the identification of the board and the identification of the case are related, if the board is replaced illegally, the identification of the board and the identification of the case may be different. In addition, it becomes easier for the inspector to detect fraudulent activities. Further, the identification display is provided at a position where the distance from the substrate in the thickness direction of the substrate is different, that is, provided in a plurality of layers in the thickness direction so that the identification display is formed only in one layer. It can be harder to remove. With such identification, if the identification is removed by fraud, the case will be noticeably damaged by being polished or shaved. Can be easily found and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 15]
A gaming machine (1) according to a fifteenth aspect includes: a control board (501) for controlling a game; storage means (502) provided on the control board (501) for storing storage contents used for controlling the game; A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the control board (501), which are different from the storage means (502); and the storage means (502) and the plurality of electronic components (595) are visible and difficult to contact. Are provided in the light-transmissive storage sections (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) and the storage sections (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) for displaying specific information. First and second information identifying sections (523, 1561) and (1560), and a third information identifying section provided in the storage means (502) for displaying specific information. And the control substrate (502) includes a first region (1900a) and a second region (1900b) having a mode different from that of the first region (1900a). In the two areas (1900b), a fourth information identification unit (1902) for displaying specific information is provided, and the first information identification unit (523,1561) and the third information identification unit (522,1562) are provided. ) Is displayed including at least the same identification display (529, 1595, 1596), the first information identification section is displayed such that the mounting portion of the storage means has an angle at which it can be visually recognized, and the second information identification section is displayed. The portion is formed of a light transmissive material, and includes a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions having reduced light transmissivity, and a first colored region (1575) of the plurality of colored regions. And a second color area (1575) different from the first color area, where a predetermined character is not attached, and is used for peeking at the plurality of electronic components stored in the storage section. A glance section (1574).

  In this case, since the first information identification section of the storage section and the third information identification section of the storage section are provided with at least the same identification display, the inspector can confirm that the storage section and the storage section on which the same identification display is displayed. Can be easily confirmed that no wrongdoing has been performed. In addition, since the first information identification unit is attached so that the mounting location of the storage unit has an angle at which the storage unit can be visually recognized, the first information identification unit is attached to the storage unit and the storage unit even when the storage unit is replaced due to fraud. By determining whether or not the identification display is the same, the inspector can easily confirm that the wrongdoing has been performed. Further, since the second information identification section of the storage section is provided with the peeping section, the inspector visually recognizes the plurality of electronic components included in the storage section via the peeping section, and checks the plurality of electronic components. It can be checked whether or not the electronic component has been tampered with. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not a plurality of electronic components included in the storage unit have been tampered with, compared to a gaming machine having no such thing as a peeping unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of fraud. In such a second information identification unit, since predetermined characters can be described in a plurality of colored regions, the predetermined characters can be written in a transparent portion without a colored region having reduced light transmittance. It is easier for the inspector to confirm the contents of the information in characters than those described. Further, in such a second information identification section, since the transparent peeping section is provided between the plurality of colored areas, compared to a case where only the plurality of colored areas are provided side by side, The colored area becomes conspicuous, and the inspector can easily check the characters and the like written in the colored area. As described above, it is easy for the inspector to find a fraudulent activity and the occurrence of the fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 16]
A game machine (game machine 1P) according to a sixteenth aspect of the present invention provides a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a storage part (board) that houses the control board and has light transmittance. Case 1700), and a seal portion (seal portion 1710) affixed to the storage portion and made of a light-transmitting material, and the seal portion includes: A plurality of colored regions (the printing unit 1711, the plurality of regions 1575), which are regions where the light transmittance is reduced, and a second colored region different from the first colored region and the first colored region of the plurality of colored regions. A portion in which predetermined characters are not attached to the colored region, and a visible region (viewing portion 1574) in which the control board stored in the storage portion can be viewed. The means is provided on the control board. Some of the plurality of electronic components (electronic components 798) are mounted so as to be visible through the viewable region, and at least one of the electronic components different from the some of the electronic components is mounted. The gist is that three electronic components (information display 1750) are mounted so as to be visible without passing through the visible region.

  According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in the sixteenth aspect, for example, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 can be visually recognized without passing through the viewing portion 1574. It is possible. Therefore, some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, so that it is easy to confirm fraudulent activities. In addition, some of the electronic components that can be viewed without the peeping portion 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be viewed through the peeping portion 1574. Unauthorized acts on some possible electronic components can be suppressed. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy visual recognition by opening the game board unit 12P of the gaming machine 1P, it is necessary to exhibit the above-described effects.

◆ [Invention 17]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) according to a seventeenth aspect includes a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a storage part (board) that houses the control board and has light transmittance. Case 1700), a control means (assembly 2P) having a seal part (seal part 1710) affixed to the storage part and formed of a light-transmitting material, and mounted on the control board to play a game. And a predetermined information display section (information display 1750) for displaying predetermined value information according to the above. The seal section includes a plurality of colored areas (printing section 1711, A plurality of regions 1575) and a portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, Before being stored in the storage section A visible area (viewing portion 1574) in which the control board can be visually recognized, wherein the control means is configured such that a part of the plurality of electronic components (electronic component 798) on the control board is visually recognized. The gist is that it is mounted so that it can be visually recognized through a possible area, and that the predetermined information display unit is mounted so that it can be visually recognized without passing through the visible area.

  According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in the seventeenth aspect, for example, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 can be visually recognized without passing through the viewing portion 1574. It is possible. Therefore, some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, so that it is easy to confirm fraudulent activities. In addition, some of the electronic components that can be viewed without the peeping portion 1574 are more conspicuous on the control board 1705 than the electronic components that can be viewed through the peeping portion 1574. Unauthorized acts on some possible electronic components can be suppressed. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy visual recognition by opening the game board unit 12P of the gaming machine 1P, it is necessary to exhibit the above-described effects.

◆ [Invention 18]
A gaming machine (1) according to an eighteenth aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A light-transmitting case portion (1803) enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
Control means having:
A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations in the control means;
A seal portion (1560) provided in the control means and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the seal portion is reduced,
The first display and the second display are:
The distance from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted to the first and second displays is different,
The seal portion,
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the case portion. The gist of the present invention is to have a peeping portion (1574) capable of peeking at the electronic component.

  In this case, the first display and the second display are provided at predetermined positions of the control means, and the distances between the storage means mounting surface of the base and the first and second displays are respectively different. It becomes difficult, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts of replacing each control means with a fraudulent base. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

  The control unit includes a board, a case unit, a storage unit, and an electronic component. Therefore, for example, the first display may be provided on the substrate and the second display may be provided on the case.

◆ [Invention 19]
A gaming machine (1) according to a nineteenth aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A light-transmitting case portion (1803) enclosing the substrate;
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
Control means having:
A seal portion (1560) provided in the control means and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) that are printed on the seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the seal portion is reduced,
First and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the identification display (1562) provided in the storage means are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and a side of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted. Distance from the surface of the first to the second display is different, respectively,
The seal portion,
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is included in the case portion. The gist of the present invention is to have a peeping portion (1574) capable of peeking at the electronic component.

◆ [Invention 20]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 20 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A light-transmissive storage section (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
Control means having:
A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations in the control means;
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information;
The first display and the second display are:
The distance from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted to the first and second displays is different,
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
The second information identification unit includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance, and are regions where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. An observing section (1574) capable of observing the electronic component;
The gist is to have.

◆ [Invention 21]
A gaming machine (1) according to Invention 21 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A light-transmitting storage part (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
Control means having:
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
First and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the third information identification unit are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and the first and second displays (1371, 1372) are displayed from the surface of the substrate on which the storage means is mounted. , 2 The distance until the display is displayed is different,
The second information identification unit includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance, and are regions where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. An observing section (1574) capable of observing the electronic component;
The gist is to have.

◆ [Invention 22]
A gaming machine (1) according to a twenty-second aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
Storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A light-transmitting storage part (1803) for storing the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and inaccessible manner;
A first information identification unit (1561, 1595) and a second information identification unit (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage unit and displaying specific information;
A third information identification unit (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means for displaying specific information;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit include:
At least include an identification that means the same content,
The second information identification unit includes:
The mounting portion of the storage means is displayed so as to have a visible angle,
The second information identification unit includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance, and are regions where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, and is stored in the storage portion. A gaze portion (1574) that can gaze at the electronic component.

  In this case, since the mounting position of the storage means can be surely visually recognized, it is possible to suppress improper operation on the control board. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 23]
A gaming machine (1) according to a twenty-third aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A first case portion (1803) having a light transmitting property and enclosing the substrate;
First storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means;
A first seal portion (1560) provided in the first case portion and formed of a material having a light transmitting property;
A plurality of first colored areas (1575) that are printed on the first seal part and are areas where light transmittance in the first seal part is reduced;
A prize ball substrate (1811) capable of two-way communication with the substrate;
A second case portion (1813) having a light transmitting property and including the winning ball substrate;
Second storage means (1812) provided on the winning ball substrate and storing data used for the winning ball;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the winning ball substrate and different from the second storage means;
A second seal portion (1816) provided on the second case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of second colored regions (1817) that are printed on the second seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the second seal portion is reduced,
The first seal portion includes:
A portion where a predetermined character is not added between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, and looks into the electronic component included in the first case portion. A first peeping section (1574) capable of
The second seal portion includes:
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the second colored region and a fourth colored region different from the second colored region, and looks into the electronic component included in the second case portion. A second viewing section (1819) capable of
The first seal portion and the second seal portion include:
The gist is that the electronic component has a light-transmitting property that can be seen through and that the light-transmitting properties of the electronic components are different.

  In this case, since the first seal portion related to the control board and the second seal portion related to the prize ball substrate have different light transmittances, it is difficult to forge the first and second seal portions, and the case portion is invalid. It is possible to make the fraudulent act of replacing with a difficult one. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 24]
A gaming machine (1) according to Invention 24 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A first case portion (1803) having a light transmitting property and enclosing the substrate;
First storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) which are provided on the substrate and are different from the first storage means and mounted through holes in the substrate;
An effect board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board,
A second case portion (1823) having a light transmitting property and including the effect substrate;
A second storage means (1822) provided on the effect board for storing data used for the effect;
A plurality of electronic components (595) that are provided on the presentation board, are different from the second storage means, and are surface-mounted on the board.
A seal portion (1560) formed of a light-transmitting material is
A plurality of colored areas (1575) which are areas where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, wherein the contained electronic component is A peeping section (1574) capable of peeping,
The gist is that it is attached to the first case portion without being attached to the second case portion.

  In this case, since the treatment of the seal portion is different between the first case portion of the control board and the second case portion of the effect board, it is difficult to forge the first and second case portions and the seal portion, and the case portion is illegal. The fraudulent act of replacing the substrate can be made difficult. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

◆ [Invention 25]
A gaming machine (1) according to a twenty-fifth aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A first case portion (1803) having a light transmitting property and enclosing the substrate;
First storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means;
Control means having:
A prize ball substrate (1811) capable of two-way communication with the substrate;
A second case portion (1813) having a light transmitting property and including the winning ball substrate;
Second storage means (1812) provided on the winning ball substrate and storing data used for the winning ball;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the winning ball substrate and different from the second storage means;
Prize ball means having
A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations in the control means;
A first seal portion (1560) provided in the first case portion and formed of a material having a light transmitting property;
A plurality of first colored areas (1575) that are printed on the first seal part and are areas where light transmittance in the first seal part is reduced;
A second seal portion (1816) provided on the second case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of second colored regions (1817) that are printed on the second seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the second seal portion is reduced,
The first display and the second display are:
The distance from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted to the first and second displays is different,
The first seal portion includes:
A portion where a predetermined character is not added between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, and looks into the electronic component included in the first case portion. A first peeping section (1574) capable of
The second seal portion includes:
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the second colored region and a fourth colored region different from the second colored region, and looks into the electronic component included in the second case portion. A second viewing section (1819) capable of
The first seal portion and the second seal portion include:
The gist is that the electronic component has a light-transmitting property that can be seen through and that the light-transmitting properties of the electronic components are different.

◆ [Invention 26]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 26 includes: a board (501) for controlling a game;
A first case portion (1803) having a light transmitting property and enclosing the substrate;
First storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means;
Control means having:
A prize ball substrate (1811) capable of two-way communication with the substrate;
A second case portion (1813) having a light transmitting property and including the winning ball substrate;
Second storage means (1812) provided on the winning ball substrate and storing data used for the winning ball;
A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the winning ball substrate and different from the second storage means;
Prize ball means having
A first seal portion (1560) provided in the first case portion and formed of a material having a light transmitting property;
A plurality of first colored areas (1575) that are printed on the first seal part and are areas where light transmittance in the first seal part is reduced;
A second seal portion (1816) provided on the second case portion and formed of a material having light transmittance;
A plurality of second colored regions (1817) that are printed on the second seal portion and are regions where light transmittance in the second seal portion is reduced,
First and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the identification display (1562) provided in the first storage means are displayed at different predetermined places in the control means, and the storage means of the substrate is mounted. Distance from the surface on the side where the first and second displays are displayed is different,
The first seal portion includes:
A portion where a predetermined character is not added between the first colored region and a third colored region different from the first colored region, and looks into the electronic component included in the first case portion. A first peeping section (1574) capable of
The second seal portion includes:
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between the second colored region and a fourth colored region different from the second colored region, and looks into the electronic component included in the second case portion. A second viewing section (1819) capable of
The first seal portion and the second seal portion include:
The gist is that the electronic component has a light-transmitting property that can be seen through and that the light-transmitting properties of the electronic components are different.

◆ [Invention 27]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 27 includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A first case portion (1803) having a light transmitting property and enclosing the substrate;
First storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) which are provided on the substrate and are different from the first storage means and mounted through holes in the substrate;
Control means having:
An effect board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board,
A second case portion (1823) having a light transmitting property and including the effect substrate;
A second storage means (1822) provided on the effect board for storing data used for the effect;
A plurality of electronic components (595) that are provided on the presentation board, are different from the second storage means, and are surface-mounted on the presentation board;
Directing means having
A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations in the control means,
The first display and the second display are:
The distance from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted to the first and second displays is different,
A seal portion (1560) formed of a light-transmitting material is
A plurality of colored areas (1575) which are areas where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, wherein the contained electronic component is A peeping section (1574) capable of peeping,
The gist is that it is attached to the first case portion without being attached to the second case portion.

◆ [Invention 28]
A gaming machine (1) according to a twenty-eighth aspect includes a board (501) for controlling a game,
A first case portion (1803) having a light transmitting property and enclosing the substrate;
First storage means (502) provided on the substrate and storing storage used for a game;
A plurality of electronic components (595) which are provided on the substrate and are different from the first storage means and mounted through holes in the substrate;
Control means having:
An effect board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board,
A second case portion (1823) having a light transmitting property and including the effect substrate;
A second storage means (1822) provided on the effect board for storing a memory used for the effect;
A plurality of electronic components (595) that are provided on the presentation board, are different from the second storage means, and are surface-mounted on the board;
And a production means having
The first and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the identification display (1562) provided in the first storage means are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and the first storage means of the substrate is The distance from the surface on which it is mounted until the first and second displays are displayed is different,
A seal portion (1560) formed of a light-transmitting material is
A plurality of colored areas (1575) which are areas where the light transmittance is reduced;
A portion where a predetermined character is not attached between a first colored region of the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, wherein the contained electronic component is A peeping section (1574) capable of peeping,
The gist is that it is attached to the first case portion without being attached to the second case portion.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a spinning-type gaming machine (a so-called slot machine). Further, the present invention can be used for a rock ball game machine and an arrangement ball game machine.

  Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to the high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all the jackpot games, but the game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of the jackpot game. In this case, the gaming machine may shift to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game.

  In addition, the game is shifted to the high-probability game state after the end of all the jackpot games, and the high-probability game state is usually ended by ending the high-probability game state when the winning is performed in the falling lottery executed at the start of the special symbol change display in the high-probability game state. A gaming machine that returns to the gaming state may be used.

  In addition, when the type of the jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, the state is shifted to the low probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and when the type of the jackpot special symbol is the specific symbol, the next time after the end of the jackpot game, A gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state that continues up to the jackpot game may be used.

  Also, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority. Although it is assumed that the gaming machine is executed, the gaming machine may simultaneously (in parallel) execute the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... gaming machine, 70 ... 1st image display apparatus (display means), 70a, 5470a ... effect design (effect design), 130 ... effect control board (variable effect control means), TZ ... special design (design).

[Application Example 1]
In order to solve the above-described problem, the gaming machine according to the application example 1 of the present application displays a symbol (special symbol TZ) in a variable manner based on the establishment of a start condition, and stops and displays the symbol in a predetermined specific symbol. in a possible gaming machine executes a favorable special game, during the variation display of the symbols, performs fluctuation effect of the display means Starring exit symbol in a plurality of rows (the first image display device 70) (performance symbol 70a), And a variable effect control means (effect control board 130) that can be controlled to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol. The variable effect control means is capable of recognizing the effect symbol in all of the plurality of columns during the variable display of the symbol, and a recognizable display mode (variable display) capable of recognizing that the effect symbol is being displayed in the variable display. Termination suggestion Out, Figure 50 - 2 (c), FIG. 52-2 (d)) a first time capable of executing a second time capable of executing the stop display mode in all of a plurality of columns the performance symbols are stopped and displayed When, by being capable of performing stop demonstration, while variable display of the symbols, common display mode is stopped and displayed in the presentation symbol common to two rows of the plurality of rows (the first display mode) can run and in the common display mode, the first variation effect (variation pattern 2A-2C), the expected high degree of second variation effect of the special game from the first variation effect (the variation pattern 3A-3C), but There, in the the case of executing the second variation effect to the case of executing a first variation effect, the first hour of running time is Ri Do different, the changing effect control means executes the second variation effect In the case of the first time , a predetermined state The first effect (change completion suggested effect, Figure 51-1) of the like and, the second effect of different aspects from the first effect (change completion suggested effect, Figure 51-2) and, Ri executable der, First holding information (holding number) for displaying the holding storage stored based on the establishment of the start condition in a first display mode, and second holding information (holding number) for displaying the holding storage in a second display mode different from the first display mode. And display control of the 2nd holding information (holding icon), and when the holding storage increases during the execution of the second variable production, the first storage information in the first holding information is changed from the first storage number to the second storage number. An increase display (updating to the reserved number with 1 added) is displayed, and the increase display from the first storage number to the second storage number in the second reservation information satisfies a predetermined condition in the first time ( The end of the 2nd fluctuating effect, the display was reduced The point is that it is not displayed until the effect design or the jackpot effect design is enlarged) .

[Application Example 1]
In order to solve the above-described problem, the gaming machine according to the application example 1 of the present application displays a symbol (special symbol TZ) in a variable manner based on the establishment of a start condition, and stops and displays the symbol in a predetermined specific symbol. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, a variation effect of an effect symbol (effect symbol 70a) is executed in a plurality of columns on the display means (first image display device 70) during the variable display of the symbol, and A variable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific effect symbol when the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol. The effect control means is capable of recognizing the effect symbol in all of a plurality of columns during the change display of the symbol, and a recognizable display mode (end of change) capable of recognizing that the effect symbol is being displayed in change. Suggestion Out, Figure 50 - 2 (c), FIG. 52-2 (d)) of the first hour and executable, the second executable stop display mode the performance symbols is determined stopped and displayed in all the plurality of rows A stop effect can be executed according to time and a common display mode (first display mode) in which temporary stop display is performed on the effect symbol common to two of two or more columns during the variable display of the symbol is performed. It is possible, and the common display mode includes a first fluctuation effect (variation patterns 2A to 2C) and a second fluctuation effect (variation patterns 3A to 3C) having a higher degree of expectation of the special game than the first fluctuation effect. The execution time of the first time is different between the case where the first variation effect is executed and the case where the second variation effect is executed, and the variation effect control means performs the first variation effect in the first variation display . The first time when performing a two-fluctuation effect In the first demonstration of a predetermined mode (change completion suggested effect, FIG. 51-1 (a), (b) , (c), FIG. 54-3 (a)) and, different from the first representation embodiment 2nd effect (effect indicating change end, FIG. 51-2 (a), (b), (c), FIG. 54-2 (c), FIG. 54-3 (b), FIG. 54-7 (b) ) And the first holding information (holding number) for displaying the holding storage stored based on the establishment of the starting condition in a first display mode, and the holding storage is different from the first display mode. The second hold information (hold icon) displayed in the second display mode can be displayed and controlled, and when the hold memory increases during the execution of the second variable effect, the first memory in the first hold information is displayed. An increase display from the number to the second storage number (update to the reserved number added by 1) is displayed. The increase display from the first storage number to the second storage number in the stay information indicates that the predetermined condition in the first time is satisfied (the second variable effect is completed, the lost effect symbol or the big hit effect symbol which has been reduced and displayed is enlarged). The first effect (paragraph [0623], FIGS. 51-1 (a), (b), (c), 54-3 (a)) is not displayed until the effect is displayed . Is shaken at least once or more, and the second effect (paragraph [0636], FIGS. 51-2 (a), (b), (c), 54-2 (c), 54-3 ( b)) is a mode different from the swing mode of the first effect, and when the first effect and the second effect are executed, the case where the first variable effect is executed and the case where the second effect is performed Is executed at a different rate (see FIGS. 55A and 55B). ) Can be summarized as.

Claims (1)

When the symbols are variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition and the symbols are stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player,
During the variation display of the symbol, a variation effect of the effect symbol to be displayed on the display means in a plurality of columns is executed, and
In the case where the symbol is stopped and displayed at the specific symbol, a variable effect control means that can be controlled to stop and display the effect symbol at a predetermined specific effect symbol,
The fluctuation effect control means,
During the variable display of the symbol, the effect symbol is recognizable in all of a plurality of columns, and a first time for executing a swingable recognizable display mode,
During the variable display of the symbols, a second effect of performing a common display mode that is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol common to two of the plurality of columns, a stop effect can be executed,
The common display mode includes:
When performing the first fluctuation effect,
And a case where a second fluctuation effect having a high degree of expectation for the execution of the special game is performed from the first fluctuation effect.
The execution time of the first time is different between the case where the first variable effect is executed and the case where the second variable effect is executed, and the predetermined effect mode in the effect symbol during the first time is different. Gaming machine characterized by being controllable as described above.